Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Canon Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series
  6. Service manual
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series Service Manual

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6275 / 6265 / 6255 Series
Service Manual
REVISION 0
Product Overview
Technology
Periodic Service
Parts Replacement and Clearning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 Series

  • Page 1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 / 6265 / 6255 Series Service Manual REVISION 0 Product Overview Technology Periodic Service Parts Replacement and Clearning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Code Service Mode Installation Appendix...
  • Page 2 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the edition of this manual.

  • Page 3: Explanation Of Symbols

    Explanation of Symbols The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of Symbols Explanation Symbols...
  • Page 4 Blank Page...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Contents Safety Precautions Power Supply Specifications: --------------------------------------------------1-12 Weight and Size -------------------------------------------------------------------1-12 CDRH Act -----------------------------------------------------------------------0-2 Productivity (Print Speed) -------------------------------------------------------1-13 Laser Safety --------------------------------------------------------------------0-2 Paper Type -------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14 Handling of Laser System --------------------------------------------------0-2 External View/Internal View ---------------------------------------------- 1-25 Turn power switch ON -------------------------------------------------------0-3 External View ----------------------------------------------------------------------1-25 Safety of Toner -----------------------------------------------------------------0-3 External Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-25 About Toner ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-3...
  • Page 6 Boot/Shutdown sequence --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11 Exposure -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-55 Controls -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13 Primary Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------2-56 Developing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-58 Flow of Image Data -----------------------------------------------------------------------2-13 Transfer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) -----2-14 Separation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Option HDD ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Drum Cleaning -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-66 HDD mirroring feature (option) ---------------------------------------------------------2-24 Drum-related Issues ----------------------------------------------------------------------2-67 Removable HDD (option) ----------------------------------------------------------------2-29 Toner Supply Area -------------------------------------------------------------------------2-70...
  • Page 7 Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-119 Jam Code List ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152 When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-120 Forced Paper Feed Control ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-154 Troubleshooting -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-121 Servicing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Pickup / Feed System ---------------------------------------------------- 2-122 Periodically Replaced Parts ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-122 Consumable Parts ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-122 When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-155...
  • Page 8 How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-218 Access -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182 Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information---------------------------- 2-218 Installing an MEAP Application ---------------------------------------------- 2-182 Check License ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-219 Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182 Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-219 Procedure to install applications ----------------------------------------------------- 2-183 Procedure to Check the License File ----------------------------------------------- 2-219...
  • Page 9 E-RDS Setup --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-254 System Logs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-287 Communication Test ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-289 Confirmation and preparation in advance ----------------------------------------- 2-254 Upgrading Updater ------------------------------------------------------------- 2-291 Steps to E-RDS settings --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-255 Steps to Service Call button settings ----------------------------------------------- 2-257 Formatting Hard Disk ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-291 Steps to Service Browser settings--------------------------------------------------- 2-261 How to Replace Controller Boards ----------------------------------------- 2-292 Initializing E-RDS settings ------------------------------------------------------------- 2-262...
  • Page 10 Removing Main Controller PCB 2 --------------------------------------------4-82 Removing the ETB Brush Roller -------------------------------------------- 4-142 Laser Exposure System --------------------------------------------------- 4-92 Removing the Waste Toner Container ------------------------------------- 4-145 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit --------------------------------------------4-92 Removing the Drum Heater -------------------------------------------------- 4-146 Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass ------------------------------------------4-95 Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit --------------------------- 4-147 Image Formation System ------------------------------------------------- 4-96 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit -------- 4-150...
  • Page 11 Removing the Right Pickup Deck ------------------------------------------- 4-198 Controller System ------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2 Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller------------------------------- 4-199 HDD -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2 Main Controller PCB 1--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller ---------------------------------- 4-199 Main Controller PCB 2--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller ------------------------------------ 4-200 TPM PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7 Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller----------------------------- 4-200 Image Formation System -------------------------------------------------------- 5-7...
  • Page 12 Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller ----------------------------------6-12 Writing System Software -----------------------------------------------------------------6-41 Download Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-41 Uneven density --------------------------------------------------------------------6-19 System Software Components ---------------------------------------------------------6-42 Smeared image -------------------------------------------------------------------6-20 Note on Download Process -------------------------------------------------------------6-43 Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level -----------------------------------------6-22 Version Upgrade via SST -------------------------------------------------------6-44 Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-44 Sleeve -------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-23...
  • Page 13 c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Points to Note When Clearing HDD---------------------------------------------------- 7-2 Error Code ----------------------------------------------------------------------7-3 Mode) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-83 Error Code Details ----------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3 Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule -----------------------------------6-89 E000 to E069 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3 Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) ------------------6-90 E100 to E199 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-14 Deleting Downloaded Firmware -----------------------------------------------6-91 E202 to E280 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-17...
  • Page 14 Language switch ------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-6 HV-TR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-83 FEED-ADJ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-90 Back-up of service mode --------------------------------------------------------- 8-7 CST-ADJ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-94 COPIER -------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8 MISC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-95 DISPLAY ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8 EXP-LED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-98 VERSION ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8 FUNCTION -------------------------------------------------------------------------8-99 USER -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31 INSTALL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-99 ACC-STS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31 CCD ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-102 ANALOG -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33 DPC ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-103 CST-STS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-34 CST ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-103...
  • Page 15 Unpacking -----------------------------------------------------------------------9-7 LCNS-TR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-176 TEST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-186 Installation ----------------------------------------------------------------------9-9 PG ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-186 Installing the Developing Assembly ------------------------------------------- 9-9 NETWORK -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-187 Installing the Pickup Assembly -----------------------------------------------9-12 NET-CAP ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-188 Installing the Fixing Assembly -------------------------------------------------9-13 COUNTER ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-190 Installing the Toner Container --------------------------------------------------9-15 TOTAL -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-190 Installing the Exhaust Filter -----------------------------------------------------9-15 PICKUP ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-191...
  • Page 16 Copy Card Reader-F1 ----------------------------------------------------- 9-84 Checking the Contents ---------------------------------------------------------9-36 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-36 Points to Note at Installation ---------------------------------------------------9-84 Installation Outline Drawing ----------------------------------------------------9-36 Checking the Contents ----------------------------------------------------------9-84 Installation Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------9-41 Copy Card Reader-F1 --------------------------------------------------------------------9-84 Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2 ----------------------------------------------------9-84 Operation Check ------------------------------------------------------------------9-44 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power ------------------------9-85 Auto Adjust Gradation -----------------------------------------------------------9-44...
  • Page 17 Checking the Contents -------------------------------------------------------- 9-109 Removing the Covers------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-142 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board ------------------------------ 9-144 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-110 Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing Assembling the Option HDD ------------------------------------------------- 9-110 HDD Data Encryption &...
  • Page 18 Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ------------ 9-219 Encryption & Mirroring Kit) ---------------------------------------------------- 9-176 [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ------------------- 9-182 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Kit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-219 Installed --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-182 Checking the Contents -------------------------------------------------------- 9-219...
  • Page 19 Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit ------------------------------ 9-256 Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-295 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit -- 9-258 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit ----------------------------------------------- 9-296 Installing the System Software Using the SST -------------------------- 9-264 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power ------------------------------------ 9-297 After Installing HDD Data Encryption &...
  • Page 20 Memory Media Removal --------------------------------------------------------------- 9-335 General Circuit Diagram (1/23)----------------------------------------------------------- XII Points to Note at Installation ------------------------------------------------- 9-336 General Circuit Diagram (2/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XIII General Circuit Diagram (3/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XIV Installation Outline Drawing -------------------------------------------------- 9-336 General Circuit Diagram (4/23)-----------------------------------------------------------XV Checking the Contents -------------------------------------------------------- 9-336 General Circuit Diagram (5/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XVI Serial Intreface KIT-K1 ----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-336 General Circuit Diagram (6/23)--------------------------------------------------------- XVII...
  • Page 21 Copy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L Printer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L Send --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LI Receive/Forward ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- LV Store/Access Files -------------------------------------------------------------------------- LVI Encrypted Secure Print--------------------------------------------------------------------LVII Set Destination -------------------------------------------------------------------- LVIII Set Destination ----------------------------------------------------------------------------LVIII Management Settings ------------------------------------------------------------ LIX User Management -------------------------------------------------------------------------- LIX Device Management ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LIX License/Other -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXI Data Management ------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXII Backup Data ------------------------------------------------------------------ LXIII Detail of HDD partition --------------------------------------------------- LXVIII...

  • Page 22: Safety Precautions

    Safety Precautions ■ CDRH Act ■ Laser Safety ■ Handling of Laser System ■ Turn power switch ON ■ Safety of Toner ■ Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery ■ Notes Before it Works imageRUNNER ADVANCE Serving 6075/6065/6055 Series ■ Points to Note at Cleaning...
  • Page 23 CDRH Act Handling of Laser System The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power. into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products (Figure).

  • Page 24: Safety Of Toner

    Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power About Toner switch. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

  • Page 25: Points To Note At Cleaning

    Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.

  • Page 26: Product Overview

    Product Overview ■ Product Lineup ■ Features ■ Specifications ■ External View/Internal View ■ Operation Product Overview...

  • Page 27: Main Body

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model Product Lineup Pickup/Delivery System Option ■ Applicable Option for Each Model Main Body ● Combination imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 / 6265 / 6255 Copy Tray-Q1 Paper Deck Unit-D1 Shift Tray-E1 Document Insertion Unit-L1 Extemal...

  • Page 28: Required Options/Conditions

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions Product name (Japan) Required options, conditions, etc. ■ Required Options/Conditions Paper Folding Insertion Folding Unit + Insertion Unit Unit-H1 Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side. ●...

  • Page 29: Scanning System Options

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Scanning System Options > Required Options and Conditions Scanning System Options Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Duplex Color Image Simultaneous 2-sided scanning ■ Required Options and Conditions Reader Unit-G1 B/W (1-sided/2-sided): 600 dpi=120/120 ipm, 300 dpi: 120/200 ipm Color (1-sided/2-sided): 600 dpi=51/51 ipm, 300 dpi:85/100 ipm Paper weight: Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-G1...

  • Page 30: Function Expansion System Options

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions Function Expansion System Options ● Hardware Products Product name Required options, conditions, etc. ■ Required Options and Conditions Utility Tray-A2 Using with Handset-G2 is not available. No particular options and conditions are required.
  • Page 31 Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Serial Interface Kit-K1 Required when the coin manager is connected. ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT-B1 No particular options and conditions are required. Using with Card Reader-C1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 Other than CKBS, TAIWAN is not available.

  • Page 32: Features

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Service Operability Features Service Features ■ Improved Service Operability Product Features ● Removing of the Process Unit becomes easy. The Process Unit can be removed by accessing only from the front side. High productivity High image quality Energy saving...

  • Page 33: New Service Mode

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Upgrading Operability ● Easy access to the parts at rear side. ■ New Service Mode Since the Rear Cover Unit becomes a retractable unit, access to the parts at rear side The description of each service mode item is displayed as well.

  • Page 34: Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications ■ Jam/Error Code Display Specifications Service Advantage When a paper jam/error is reported from the user: Jam code: • The location (device) causing the paper jam/error can be recognized before the service “Jam Code”...

  • Page 35: Applying New Connectors

    Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Applying New Connectors 1-10 ■ Applying New Connectors Newly-configured connectors are used as some connectors on each controller PCB. F-1-12 ● Purpose To prevent the communication error caused by the following: • Loose/removed connector due to vibration during transportation •...

  • Page 36: Specifications

    Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications 1-11 Specifications Installation type of main body Console type Paper size Deck A4, B5, LTR Cassette A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, LDR, LGL, Product Specifications LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXE Multi-purpose Tray Cassette feedable size Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Postcard Installation type of main body...

  • Page 37: Power Supply Specifications

    Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size 1-12 Power Supply Specifications: Weight and Size Product name Power Japan North Europe Asia Australia Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg) imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 / 1220 supply America 6265/ 6255 source Paper Deck Unit-A1...

  • Page 38: Productivity (Print Speed)

    Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print Speed) 1-13 Productivity (Print Speed) Unit: sheets / minute Paper type Size Feeding Width imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6265 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6255 Deck / Cassette Multi-purpose Tray Deck / Cassette Multi-purpose Tray Deck / Cassette Multi-purpose Tray direction...

  • Page 39: Paper Type

    Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-14 Paper Type Following shows the types of usable papers. See the table below for the custom paper size. Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm) Custom paper size 0-1 148.0 to 487.7 100 to 139.6 Custom paper size 0-2 148.0 to 181.9...
  • Page 40 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-15 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m 11x17 431.8 279.4...
  • Page 41 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-16 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Plain paper 1 (64 to 90 g/m Recycled paper 1 (64 to 90 g/m Color paper...
  • Page 42 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-17 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Heavy paper 1 (91 to 180 g/m Letterhead 11x17 431.8...
  • Page 43 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-18 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Heavy paper 2 (181 to 220 g/m 11x17 431.8 279.4...
  • Page 44 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-19 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Heavy paper 3 (221 to 256 g/m 11x17 431.8 279.4...
  • Page 45 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-20 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Transparency 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4 LTRR...
  • Page 46 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-21 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Labels 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4 LTRR...
  • Page 47 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-22 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Tracing 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4 LTRR...
  • Page 48 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-23 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Cotton (Bond) 11x17 431.8 279.4 355.6 215.9 215.9 279.4...
  • Page 49 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type 1-24 Pickup position Feeding Width Type Size direction direction Multi-purpose Paper Paper (mm) (mm) Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Insertion Unit Tray Deck-A1 Deck-D1 Pre-Punched paper 215.9 279.4 Postcard Postcard Reply Postcard 4 on 1 Postcard T-1-12...

  • Page 50: External View/Internal View

    Product Overview > External View/Internal View > External View > External Cover 1-25 External View/Internal View [32] External View [34] [31] [17] [33] ■ External Cover [30] [18] [29] [16] [28] [19] [27] [26] [15] [25] [20] [24] [23] [14] [21] [22] [13]...

  • Page 51: Switches, I/F, Others

    Product Overview > External View/Internal View > Cross-Section View 1-26 Cross-Section View ■ Switches, I/F, Others Drum Cleaning Unit Pre-exposure Primary Charging Assembly ETB Unit Laser Scanner (Transfer Belt Unit) Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Fixing Assembly Developing Assembly Pre-transfer Reverse Delivery Unit Charging Assembly Main Power Switch...

  • Page 52: Operation

    Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Control Panel 1-27 Operation Control Panel ■ Control Panel Power Switch ■ Types of Power Switches Power Main Menu This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Control Panel Power Switch and the Energy Saver Environment Heater Switch.

  • Page 53: Main Menu

    Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Main Menu 1-28 ■ Main Menu ■ Differences in Main Menu iR 7105/iR 5075 Series iR ADVANCE 8105 / iR ADVANCE 6075 Series Copy Copy Send/Fax Scan and Send Mail Box Scan and Save (New) Access Stored Files (New) Fax/I-Fax Inbox...

  • Page 54: Settings/Registration Menu

    Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Settings/Registration Menu 1-29 ■ Settings/Registration Menu ■ Differences in Settings/Registration Menu iR 5075/5065/5055 Series iR ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 Series Common Settings Preferences Settings/Registration Timer Setting Select an item to set Adjustment/Cleaning Adjustment/Maintenance System Settings Management Settings...

  • Page 55: Technology

    Technology ■ Basic Configuration ■ Main Controller ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing ■ Pickup / Feed System ■ External Auxiliary System ■ MEAP ■ Embedded RDS ■ Updater ■ System Management Operations Technology...

  • Page 56: Functional Configuration

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration Basic Configuration Functional Configuration The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block. Document exposure system Reader Exposure lamp...

  • Page 57: Basic Sequence

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON Basic Sequence ■ Basic sequence at power ON Main power ON Print Unit INITIAL INITIAL ROTATION STBY Polygon Motor(M44) ETB Motor(M43) Developing Motor(M2) Drum Motor(M1) Developing Clutch(CL1) Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor(EPC1)

  • Page 58: Basic Sequence At Printing

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> ■ Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> Start key ON Print Unit STBY INTR PRINT...

  • Page 59: Basic Sequence At Printing

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> ■ Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery> Start key ON Print Unit STBY INTR PRINT...

  • Page 60: Main Controller

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Features Main Controller Main Controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the Riser (connector for interface). Removability/installability of Main Controller PCB 1 has been improved by introducing this configuration (Slot-in/out) Overview ■ Features Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high functionality.

  • Page 61: Specifications/Configuration

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration ■ Specifications/configuration ● Memory Main controller PCB 1 ● PCBs BAT1 Main Controller PCB 1 DDR2-SDRAM 1GB (Standard) Main Controller PCB 2 HDD(Option) HDD(Standard) TPM PCB Flash PCB F-2-7 Parts name Function, specifications, features Main controller CPU: 1.8 GHz, Control of the entire system PCB 1...
  • Page 62 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration Main controller PCB 2 ● I/F, connector Main controller PCB 1 Voice Guidance Kit-F1 BAT1 Mini-USB DDR2-SDRAM DDR2-SDRAM 512MB Standard 512MB Option USB(D) Riser USB(H) Flash F-2-9 Parts name Function, specifications, features DDR2-SDRAM 512 MB (standard) / clock frequency: 400 MHz J1025 CC-VI...
  • Page 63 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration Main controller PCB 2 Reader Data Analyzer Board J2017 FAX-L1 Control J2083 Memory PCB Riser FAX Power Supply DC Controller Image Power Supply Power Supply Control HDD Power DC Controller Control USB-FAX Supply J2024 F-2-11...
  • Page 64 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration 2-10 ● Function expansion options Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB1 Voice Data Analyzer Board Guidance DDR2-SDRAM Board F-2-13 Name Function, specifications, features Image analysis PCB Product name: Data Analyzer Board-B1 Scan protection for output original (Copy/SEND/BOX) T-2-7 F-2-12...

  • Page 65: Boot/Shutdown Sequence

    Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence 2-11 ● HDD ■ Boot/Shutdown sequence The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added. ● Boot sequence User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 50 GB and Advanced Box area is 15 GB. Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
  • Page 66 Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence 2-12 Related error codes (major error codes): Error code Error description E602 HDD error 0001 HDD failed to be recognizedStartup partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup 0002 No system software for the main CPU 0006 No system software for the sub CPU 4000...

  • Page 67: Controls

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data 2-13 Controls ● Print ■ Flow of Image Data Network Following shows major image data flow. • The arrow mark indicates the flow of image data. ① • Numbers (1, 2, etc.) indicate processing order. Controller ●...

  • Page 68: Security Features (Encryption Key And Certificate, Password Protection)

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-14 ● SEND ■ Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) Reader ● Overview ⑤ Scan type image ① The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named “TPM PCB”. “TPM” Format conversion processing stands for “Trusted Platform Module”, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating...
  • Page 69 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-15 ● Configuration of Security Information security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute “Initialize All The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
  • Page 70 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-16 ● Preparation before Installing TPM ● Works before / after introduction Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data. Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is OFF by default). Follow the steps below to back up data.
  • Page 71 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-17 1. Enable Functionality 2.TPM Key Backup The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system: NOTE:Setup of “System Management PIN” FAT32).
  • Page 72 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-18 3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup. confirmation. If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen.
  • Page 73 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-19 3. Restore of TPM key CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration. Procedure is about the same as the backup work. If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message Difference between restore work and backup work: and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen.
  • Page 74 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-20 4. Disable the feature Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) > To set “OFF” for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings]. [Device Management] >...
  • Page 75 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-21 ● Overview of Actions taken against Troubles ● Related Error Code Location Error TPM Setting = ON TPM Setting = OFF Relevant Error Code Error description, Assumed cause, remedy with failure Code...
  • Page 76 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-22 ● Security Information Storage Location Error Error description, Assumed cause, remedy Code Storage Backup Data Type Function Name of Data E746 Error in encryption Location Availability 0033...

  • Page 77: Option Hdd

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Option HDD 2-23 ■ Option HDD Storage Backup Data Type Function Name of Data Location Availability The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 SRAM Password/ Network Policy common key for IPSec inch/1TB HDD-K1 (option) makes 1TB in HDD capacity.

  • Page 78: Hdd Mirroring Feature (Option)

    Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-24 ■ HDD mirroring feature (option) Mirroring PCB controls reading/writing timing of HDD data. LED PCB makes the LED show operation status of the HDDs. This option enables mirroring of HDD data (RAID1). In the case of failure in one HDD, the operation is performed with the other HDD.
  • Page 79 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-25 ● To start using this feature (installation) “Rebuild” progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel. “Copying hard disk data... xx%“ HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the Install HDD2 mirroring PCB NOTE:...
  • Page 80 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-26 ● HDD reading/writing operation ● Description of Modes The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes. At reading: At writing: The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses. Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD) The same data is written to each HDD at The status flows among the modes below during operation.
  • Page 81 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-27 Mode Flow at Start-up Mode Flow during Operation Turn ON Main Power Switch Mirror Mode Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion Trouble Halt Mode Degrade Mode Rebuild Mode Mirror Mode Either HDD In which HDD?
  • Page 82 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-28 ● Overview of Trouble Recovery ● Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to 1.

  • Page 83: Removable Hdd (Option)

    HDD encryption and mirroring functionality with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
  • Page 84 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional) 2-30 The following shows the statuses for each use case. 1. Initialize the encryption board via SST. Case 1: Normally operated This step makes the disk unformatted (E602-0001 is triggered if the unformatted disk is Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other started).
  • Page 85 Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional) 2-31 The figure below shows the final screen in initializing the encryption board. E610 and detailed codes The message as shown in the figure below is shown on the screen. Detailed E code Cause (Detected Error)

  • Page 86: Service Operations

    Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > HDD 2-32 Service Operations 2. After Replacing 1) HDD format ■ HDD 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn ON the main powerswitch.) <Procedure of parts replacement> 1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.

  • Page 87: Main Controller Pcb

    Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1 2-33 ■ Main Controller PCB 1 When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager <Procedure of parts replacement> Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1,"...
  • Page 88 Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2 2-34 ■ Main Controller PCB 2 NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing Main Controller PCB 2," on p. 4-82. <Procedure of adjustment>...
  • Page 89 Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2 2-35 1. Before Replacing 2. When Replacing Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. 1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB 1) Backup of the set/registered data •...

  • Page 90: Tpm Pcb

    Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > TPM PCB 2-36 3. After Replacing 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. 2) Restoring the backup data Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export 3) Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed out before replacement, reset/register the data.

  • Page 91: Laser Exposure System

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview 2-37 Laser Exposure System Laser is applied to the Nom-image image on the positively-charged drum with this machine. Image area Overview Non-image area Non-image area ■ Overview Laser ON Laser ON This machine uses an 8-beam method that enables exposure of 8 beams per scanning direction for high productivity.

  • Page 92: Specifications

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-38 ■ Specifications ■ Parts Configuration Item Description Image Formation Lens Wave length 670nm (large) Laser type Red color laser Image Formation Lens Laser team (small) Laser output 7mW(Max) Number of laser beams 8 beams Reflection mirror Laser Driver PCB...

  • Page 93: Controls

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control 2-39 Controls ■ Laser ON Timing Control ● Laser ON/OFF Control ■ Overview This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser control signals.
  • Page 94 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control 2-40 ● Main Scanning Synchronization Control NOTE: This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction. EEPROM on the Laser Driver PCB stores the 8-beam phase displacement coefficient (laser phase coefficient), which is unique to the Laser Scanner Unit, and corrects 8-beam phase difference based on the stored coefficient.

  • Page 95: Laser Beam Intensity Control

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control 2-41 ● Sub Scanning Synchronization Control ■ Laser Beam Intensity Control This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction. ● APC (Auto Power Control) Control To keep constant laser light intensity per 8 beams (1BD basis) <Execution timing>...

  • Page 96: Polygon Motor Control

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control 2-42 ■ Polygon Motor Control ■ Laser Shutter Control This control is performed to rotate the polygon mirror at a specified speed. To prevent laser exposure in the machine when the Cover is open <Execution timing>...
  • Page 97 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control 2-43 2-43 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control...
  • Page 98 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control 2-44 2-44 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control...

  • Page 99: Servicing

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments 2-45 Servicing ■ Periodically Replaced Parts None ■ Consumable Parts None ■ Periodical Servicing List Cleaning Parts name Remarks interval Clean when black lines or the like occurs due to soil on Dust-proof glass the Dustproof Glass.

  • Page 100: Image Formation System

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications 2-46 Image Formation System ■ Specifications ● Basic Specifications Overview Item Function/Method Photosensitive Drum Material A-Si ■ Overview Drum diameter 84 mm diameter Cleaning Cleaning Blade Toner image is formed by the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing method in Process speed iR-ADV 6075: 350 mm/sec image formation system.

  • Page 101: Parts Configuration

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-47 ● Charging Specifications ■ Parts Configuration ● Entire Configuration Primary Charging Developing High Pre-transfer Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB Charging PCB (PCB12) Toner Container (PCB11) (PCB26) Toner Supply Assembly Primary Charging Wire Developing...
  • Page 102 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-48 ● Process Area ● Transfer Area Primary Charging Idler Roller Pre-exposure LED Assembly Transfer Roller Drive Roller Grid Wire Static Eliminator Cleaning Blade Drum Cleaning Separation Guide Primary Blade Potential Sensor Charging Wire Developing Blade...
  • Page 103 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-49 ● Toner Supply Area ● Waste Toner Feeding Area Waste Toner Feed Screw Front View Waste Toner Feed Screw Toner Container Hopper Drum Cleaning Unit ETB cleaning Unit Sub Hopper Waste Toner Feed Assembly Toner Stirrer Buffer...

  • Page 104: Drive Configuration

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration 2-50 ■ Drive Configuration ● Transfer Area PS55 PS56 F-2-67 Code Parts name Function Duplex Feed Left Motor To make the ETB Unit (ETB) engaged/disengaged PS61 ETB Motor To drive the ETB Drive Roller, the Brush Roller and the Waste Toner Feed Screw.
  • Page 105 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration 2-51 ● Toner Supply Area Code Parts name Function Buffer Toner Sensor 1 To detect toner level in the Buffer(To avoid oversupply to the Buffer) Buffer Toner Sensor 2 To detect toner level in the Buffer (to detect absence of toner in the Buffer) PS54 PS54 Toner Replacement Cover Sensor To detect whether the Toner Replacement Cover is...

  • Page 106: Waste Toner Feeding Area

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process 2-52 ● Waste Toner Feeding Area ■ Print Process Block Step Overview Static formation 1 Exposure Light emission from the Pre-exposure LED removes residual block potential on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to prevent density unevenness.
  • Page 107 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process 2-53 1.Electrostatic latent image formation Block 2.Primary Charging 1.Pre-exposure 3.Laser exposure 6.Drum cleaning Block 2.Development Photosensitive 4.Development 10.Drum Cleaning Block Drum 3.Transfer 5.Pre-transfer Charging 4.Fixing Block Block Delivery 8.Fixing 7.Separation 6.Transfer Registration MP Pickup Tray ETB Unit...

  • Page 108: Controls

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls 2-54 Controls Control name Description Exposure Pre-exposure control To apply the light of the Pre-exposure LED on the surface of the Primary Charging Exposure -Primary charging bias control Photosensitive Drum. -Pre-exposure control -Primary charging wire cleaning control Primary charging -Primary charging shutter control Separation...

  • Page 109: Exposure

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Exposure 2-55 ■ Exposure Control name Description Toner supply ● Pre-exposure Control Toner level detection To detect toner level in the Developing Unit and the Buffer Unit. Toner supply control To supply toner from the Toner Container to the Developing To prevent uneven density with the print image, residual potential on the Photosensitive Drum Assembly.

  • Page 110: Primary Charging

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging 2-56 ■ Primary Charging ● Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Control To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Primary Charging Wire. ● Primary Charging Bias Control <Execution timing> To make the surface of the Photosensitive Drum evenly and positively charged. •...
  • Page 111 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging 2-57 ● Primary Charging Shutter Control Shutter Open/Close Operation Sequence To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products Elapsing time Operation (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Primary Charging Assembly. Image formation is 1.

  • Page 112: Developing

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing 2-58 <Control description> ■ Developing The shutter is open or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire. ● Developing Bias Control The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin. To form a toner image on the Photosensitive Drum by charging toner on the Developing The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M6) moves the Cleaning Pad to the Cylinder.
  • Page 113 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing 2-59 ● Dust-collection Bias Control ● Developing Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism To collect toner which floats over the Photosensitive Drum during developing process. There are shutters at the Supply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to prevent toner scattering.

  • Page 114: Transfer

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-60 <Opening and Closing Operations of the Buffer Shutter> ■ Transfer By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body, edge of the Supply Mouth on the ● Pre-transfer Charging Bias Control assembly hits to leading edge of the Buffer Shutter.
  • Page 115 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-61 ● Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Control ● Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Control To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
  • Page 116 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-62 ● Transfer Bias Control ● ETB Cleaning Control To transfer toner on the Photosensitive Drum to a paper. To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the residual toner on the Transfer The transfer bias (DC positive), which has been generated on the Transfer High Voltage PCB Belt is removed.
  • Page 117 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer 2-63 ● ETB Engagement/Disengagement Control To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the ETB is engaged or disengaged Transfer Belt with the Photosensitive Drum. Disengagement Engagement <Execution timing> •...

  • Page 118: Separation

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Separation 2-64 ■ Separation ● Separation Control <Separation from the Drum> Separation is performed using the curvature separation method. Photosensitive Drum Paper Separation Claw F-2-87 NOTE: The Separation Claw separates sheets before entering the Drum Cleaning Unit. This effectively avoids failure in paper feed (double feed, etc.) Paper Separation Claw...
  • Page 119 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Separation 2-65 ● Separation Claw Reciprocation Control <Separation from the ETB> By moving the Separation Claw back and forth (reciprocation), scar on the drum caused by Separation is performed using the curvature separation method and the Static Eliminator. the Separation Claw can be prevented.

  • Page 120: Drum Cleaning

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Cleaning 2-66 ■ Drum Cleaning ● Separation Bias Control To prevent image soil caused by toner accumulated on the Drum Separation Claw, this ● Drum Cleaning Control control prevents attachment of toner on the Photosensitive Drum with the Drum Separation The blade, which is in contact with the Drum, removes residual toner and paper dust on the Claw.

  • Page 121: Drum-Related Issues

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues 2-67 ■ Drum-related Issues ● Drum Heater Control To make potential characteristic for charging or exposure stable by keeping the specified ● Drum HP Detection temperature of the Photosensitive Drum. To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum.
  • Page 122 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues 2-68 <Operating condition> Operating condition of the heater differs according to the status of the Environment Switch and the host machine. A.2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt*1) <Environment Switch: OFF> Main Power sleep mode (low energy sleep mode (high energy Mode WarmUp(Recovery)
  • Page 123 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues 2-69 B.2-dimensional shading ON *1] <Environment Switch: OFF> Main Power sleep mode (low energy sleep mode (high energy Mode WarmUp(Recovery) Standby/Energy Saver Copy/Print consumption)*3 consumption)*3 Main SW Switch Cassette SW Drum Heater Cassette...

  • Page 124: Toner Supply Area

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area 2-70 <Environment Control> ■ Toner Supply Area Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main ● Toner Container Detection power continues. Toner Container detection is not performed with this machine.
  • Page 125 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area 2-71 Toner Level Detection: NOTE: The Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS2) detects amount of toner around the Buffer Toner Container Inlet. If toner is supplied excessively from the Sub Hopper to the Buffer Unit (if there are toner clusters), toner in the Buffer may overflow.

  • Page 126: Waste Toner Feeding Area

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area 2-72 ■ Waste Toner Feeding Area Toner level Status Message Operation 5% or less Replace the toner After "Replace the toner cartridge." ● Waste Toner Full Level Detection cartridge.
  • Page 127 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area 2-73 This machine performs black band control in order to maintain the drum cleaning ● Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock Detection performance. To detect lock state of the Waste Toner Feed Screw. Therefore the criterion of the full Waste Toner Container varies according to the environment The drive by the Developing Motor (M2) is transmitted to the Screw Gear, which makes and the image duty as shown in the following table.

  • Page 128: Image Stabilization Control

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-74 ■ Image Stabilization Control ● Overview This control prevents image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum to ensure stabilized print. Laser Power(Lp) Primary Laser Power(Lp) Primary current (Ip)
  • Page 129 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-75 ● Execution Timing Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts. Following shows the control items at each sequence. Illustration.*70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,** 30 sec.70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,***Fixing temperature remaining high at power OFF/ON Timing Initial...
  • Page 130 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-76 Timing Initial Paper Last Standard Warm-up rotation Interruption Arbitrary rotation interval rotation duration Forcible Control Remarks Normal power PASCAL PASCAL (second) Door interruption Low duty startup OFF/ Normal (Full (Quick Approx.
  • Page 131 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-77 ● Potential Control <Control description> 1. VD control Perform the following controls according to the deterioration level of the Photosensitive Drum 1) The primary current (Ip_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last potential and the environmental change.
  • Page 132 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-78 2. VL control [When the drum surface potential is not as follows: -10V <= target potential <= +10V ] 1) The laser power (LP_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last bright area •...
  • Page 133 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-79 3. Determination of developing bias (Vdc) Start of VI potential Developing bias is determined by adding the Vback value (based on the environment table) control to VL (bright area potential) determined in the foregoing control. Irradiate laser power defined in the previous Developing bias (Vdc) = VL+Vback potential control and measure...
  • Page 134 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-80 ● PASCAL Control NOTE: This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics on the image. Since Inbox images are binary, gradation adjustment cannot be performed after being stored in Inbox. Gradation adjustment is performed on the rasterized data before they This control is executed when the following is selected in user mode: Auto Adjust Gradation >...

  • Page 135: Auxiliary Control

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-81 ■ Auxiliary Control ● Laser APC Control This control corrects laser output control value to prevent change of surface potential by laser ● Startup Contrast Potential (Vcont) Correction output. Contrast potential (Vcont) is corrected to keep a constant density and prevent light image caused by reduced toner charging amount in an energy-saving environment.
  • Page 136 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-82 ● Two Dimension Shading Control Bright area potential Uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum is corrected by laser exposure. characteristics( ) VL (V) Execution timing At the time of laser exposure (only when the two dimension shading control is ON. Default: VL0re Procedure 3) OFF)
  • Page 137 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-83 ● White Band Control DC Controller PCB Oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve is forcibly applied on the Drum and collected by the Cleaning Unit. NOTE: Calculation Large-grained toner is less likely to be charged compared to small-grained toner and can be positively charged (opposite charging) in rare cases.
  • Page 138 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-84 ● Black Band Control Control description 1) Black band described below is created on the Drum. This control maintains the cleaning performance by providing sufficient amount of toner to the 2) Black band is scraped by the Drum Cleaning Blade and toner is properly applied on the edge of the Cleaning Blade.
  • Page 139 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-85 ● Low Duty Discharge Control In the case of continuous output of low duty image, this control consumes toner at non-image area to maintain the density stability. Execution timing While the video count for every page is accumulated, in the case that the average image duty is less than the threshold , the ongoing job is interrupted at the time of last rotation of a job or...
  • Page 140 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-86 2-86 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control...
  • Page 141 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control 2-87 2-87 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control...

  • Page 142: Servicing

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List 2-88 Servicing ■ Periodical Servicing List Expected ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Parts/Area Name Remarks life* Expected COUNTER Toner Receptacle Tray Remove toner on the tray. Parts Name Parts Nunber Piece Remarks needed life*...

  • Page 143: When Replacing Parts

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-89 ■ When Replacing Parts CAUTION: When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side. Parts Counter (COPIER >...
  • Page 144 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-90 Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the When the rear side test print image is dark replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output NOTE: a test print and check the image.

  • Page 145: Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-91 ● Pre-transfer Charging Assembly CAUTION: <Procedure of parts replacement> Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment see "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly," on p. 4-107. screws with the same amount.
  • Page 146 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-92 ● Drum 4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-122. <Procedure of adjustment>...

  • Page 147: Developing Assembly, Developing Cylinder

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments 2-93 ● Drum Side Seals(Front and Rear) ● ETB <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Side Seal," on p. 4-127. • see "Removing the ETB Unit," on p. 4-137. <Procedure of adjustment>...

  • Page 148: Troubleshooting

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-94 ■ Troubleshooting [Image Sample] ● Trailing Edge Shock Imaget Feed direction <Shock image located approx. 63mm [Location] 55mm from the trailing edge> [Cause] Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation speed between the ETB and drum differs [Condition] When replacing the ETB...

  • Page 149: Uneven Density Correction By 2D Shading

    Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-95 ● Uneven density correction by 2D shading 3) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6 To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum. Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3 (LDR) or larger.
  • Page 150 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-96 5) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of CAUTION: uneven density. It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes 5-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode.
  • Page 151 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-97 5-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image. 5-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen. When uneven density is seen: Go to 5-3). After selecting "S-LINE1 to 4", select the target vertical scanning window (1 to 27), When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended.
  • Page 152 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-98 5-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the ● Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw procedure. [Location] Drum Separation Claw CAUTION: If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure, reenter [Cause]...
  • Page 153 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-99 ● Uneven density [Cause] Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change Feed Direction in drum characteristics due to wear. F-2-121 [Field Remedy] In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result.
  • Page 154 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-100 ● Smeared image [Image] [Cause] Feed Direction Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared <...
  • Page 155 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-101 2-101 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting...

  • Page 156: Fixing

    Technology > Fixing > Overview > Characteristics 2-102 Fixing <IH (Induction Heating) method> Supplying high frequency current to the coil inside the Heater Unit generates a high frequency magnetic field around the coil. By this magnetic field, an eddy current (induction Overview current) runs through the Fixing Roller and the Fixing Roller generates electricity by itself.

  • Page 157: Specifications

    Technology > Fixing > Overview > Parts configuration 2-103 ■ Specifications ■ Parts configuration Item Function/method ● Cross-section view Fixing method IH fixing method Fixing Heater IH heater Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller Fixing Roller O/D: 40mm Pressure Roller O/D: 38mm Control temperature (Japanese model) Fixing Cleaning...

  • Page 158: Drive Configuration

    Technology > Fixing > Overview > Drive configuration 2-104 ● Thermistor, Thermal Switch ■ Drive configuration Flux blocking plate Fixing Cleaning Web (Shutter) Level Sensor(PS45) Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid Fixing Shutter Motor Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Fixing Motor (THM2) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Shutter Gear (THM3)
  • Page 159 Technology > Fixing > Overview > Drive configuration 2-105 Code Parts name Function/method Fixing Motor To control drive of the Fixing Motor Fixing Shutter Motor To control drive of the Shutter Fixing Cleaning Web Drive To control drive of the Cleaning Web Solenoid Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor To prevent scratches on Fixing Roller due to jam...

  • Page 160: Controls

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-106 Controls ■ Fixing temperature control ● Overview ■ Overview To prevent fixing failure, temperature control of the Fixing Roller is executed with the following timing. Cleaning Web length detection Temperature control Overview Cleaning Web Temperature control during...
  • Page 161 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-107 ● Temperature control during startup <Low temperature environment startup mode> After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until Temperature is controlled to reach the standby temperature. completion of the potential control, and then the machine enters ready state.
  • Page 162 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-108 ● Temperature Control for Standby The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country. The details on the control temperature are shown below. To provide measures against temperature rise of the coil/Main Body and save energy consumption, the target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it •...
  • Page 163 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-109 ● Temperature control during printing • Normal environment 17 degC or higher The target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it reaches a Time (minute) Destination Model Paper Type...
  • Page 164 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control 2-110 ● Other temperature adjustments ● Related Error Code <Energy Saver mode> E000: Fixing Assembly low temperature error By pressing the energy saver key on the Control Panel, energy consumption is reduced by E001: Fixing Assembly high temperature error reducing the control temperature when the Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the E002: Fixing Assembly temperature rise error...

  • Page 165: Down Sequence Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Down sequence control 2-111 ■ Down sequence control ● Control description This control has the 3 types of down sequences according to the execution timing. ● Overview 1) In the case of decrease in fixing temperature (during printing) In the case of great difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature When the fixing temperature drops during the job, the productivity is dropped or the job is at the start of printing or during printing, productivity is dropped to prevent fixing failure or...
  • Page 166 Technology > Fixing > Controls > Down sequence control 2-112 2) When printing is started and the paper type is switched ● Related Service Mode Because fixing temperature differs according to the paper type, switching the paper type • To change temperature threshold of down sequence with special paper causes downtime.

  • Page 167: Shutter Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Shutter Control 2-113 ■ Shutter Control The shutter is set in the home position when printing is completed. < Home Position (HP)> ● Overview To prevent image failure and reduction in productivity caused by temperature rise at the edge, Shutter this machine introduces the Shutter (to shield magnetic flux;...

  • Page 168: Paper Anti-Wrapping Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Paper Anti-wrapping Control 2-114 ● Related Error Code ■ Paper Anti-wrapping Control IH Shutter Motor error ● Overview E840-0001: When the Shutter failed to be moved to the specified position (failed to be at With this control, failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the Fixing normal state) despite 3-times retry operation Roller and the Pressure Roller is prevented.

  • Page 169: Thermistor Reciprocating Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Thermistor reciprocating control 2-115 ● Control description ■ Thermistor reciprocating control In the case of delay jam at the fixing outlet, the DC Controller determines paper wrapping if To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) and the paper remains in the Fixing Assembly and executes the following.

  • Page 170: Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Control

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web drive control 2-116 ■ Upper separation claw reciprocating control ■ Cleaning web drive control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw, the Upper Separation To prevent fixing offset, the residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller is removed with Claw is moved back and forth by 3mm in the direction of the Fixing Roller.

  • Page 171: Cleaning Web Length Detection

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web length detection 2-117 ● Related Error Code ■ Cleaning web length detection Error in connection of the Fixing Web Solenoid When the length of the Cleaning Web is reduced, the Web Level Detection Arm is moved in 005-0001 the direction of the arrow to block the light path of the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Detection Sensor (PS45).

  • Page 172: Protective Function

    Technology > Fixing > Controls > Protective function 2-118 ■ Protective function ● Detecting an Error Using the Thermistor In the event of the following, the machine will set the DC power (12 V) used to drive the AC relay (found on the fixing heater power supply PCB), thereby stopping the AC power to the fixing heater.

  • Page 173: Servicing

    Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List 2-119 Servicing ■ Periodical Servicing List Parts/Area Operation ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Piece Remarks Name Interval Parts name Parts Number Piece Expected Remarks Fixing inlet guide Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. Fixing Right Stay Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

  • Page 174: When Replacing Parts

    Technology > Fixing > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-120 ■ When Replacing Parts ● Fixing Roller <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-186. <Procedure of adjustment> 1) Grease Application Apply approx.

  • Page 175: Troubleshooting

    Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-121 ■ Troubleshooting ● Checking nip width In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the ● Paper wrinkle specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the <Location>...

  • Page 176: Pickup / Feed System

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Overview 2-122 Pickup / Feed System Overview : Forced Paper Feed Control : Paper path ■ Overview : One Unit • Supported media (heavy paper) (52g/m2 -> 256g/m2) This feature is enabled by making gentler curve of the pre-registration path, reverse path and duplex merging path.

  • Page 177: Specifications

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications 2-123 ■ Specifications Item Function/Method Paper Storage Front Loading Method Method Pickup Method Separation Retard Method Paper Feed Standard Center Paper Loading Left/Right Deck 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) Capacity Cassette 3/4 550 sheets (80 g/m2) Multi-purpose 100 sheets (80 g/m2)

  • Page 178: Parts Configuration

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration 2-124 ■ Parts configuration PS No. Sensor No. Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor PS52 PS51 PS10 PS20 PS67 PS47 PS29 PS64 Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor Right Deck Paper Height Sensor Right Deck Paper Sensor Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor...
  • Page 179 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration 2-125 ● Roller Fixing Roller Duplex Merging Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation/Feed Roller Registration Roller Outer Delivery Roller Reverse Inlet Roller Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Inner Delivery Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Pressure roller Reverse Upper Roller Registration Front Roller...

  • Page 180: Drive Configuration

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration 2-126 ■ Drive Configuration Name Fixing Motor Right Deck Lifter Motor Left Deck Lifter Motor Right Deck Pickup Motor Cassette3/4 Pickup Motor Delivery Motor Reverse Motor Duplex Feed Right Motor Duplex Feed Left Motor Cassette3 Lifter Motor Cassette4 Lifter Motor...

  • Page 181: Paper Path

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path 2-127 ■ Paper path Feeding path Delivery Flapper Multi Tray Reverse Flapper Duplex Flapper [3],[4] Option Pickup Left Deck Pigkup Right Deck Pigkup Cassette 3 Pickup Cassette 4 Pickup F-2-150 1-side face-up delivery, duplex face-down delivery 1-side face-down delivery, duplex printing...

  • Page 182: Interval Speed

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed 2-128 ■ Interval speed Model ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 [mm/s] [ppm] :Pickup Speed Pickup speed :Vertical path/duplex speed Vertical path/duplex speed :Pre-registration speed Pre-registration speed :Post-registration speed Post-registration speed :Process speed Process speed :Delivery speed Delivery speed...

  • Page 183: Various Types Of Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control 2-129 ■ Various types of control Unit Contorol Basic Movement Fixing Assembly Secondary Transfer Unit Registration Unit Deck/Cassette detection Paper Size Detection Deck/cassette pickup unit Paper Level Detection Paper Detection Pickup Retry Control Pickup Retry Control...

  • Page 184: Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement 2-130 Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit ● Cassette Cassette Feed ■ Basic Movement Roller Cassette Pickup When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface PS21 Roller /PS22...

  • Page 185: Deck/Cassette Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection 2-131 ■ Deck/Cassette detection ● Cassette Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size Whether Deck/Cassette is installed is detected Detection Switch (SW14/SW16) are not pressed, it is detected as no cassette installed ●...

  • Page 186: Paper Size Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection 2-132 ■ Paper Size Detection ● Cassette Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches. ● Deck ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection Circular Plate/ Set in Service Mode.

  • Page 187: Paper Size Detection Switch

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection 2-133 ● Paper size detection Switch SW7/SW8 Paper Width Length Width SW7/SW8 Length SW9/SW10 Size (mm) (mm) 257.0 182.0 EXEC 267.0 184.0 270.0 195.0 A5-R 148.5 210.0 297.0 210.0...

  • Page 188: Paper Level Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection 2-134 ■ Paper Level Detection Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49) Paper level is detected by two Paper Level sensors in each cassette Full ●...
  • Page 189 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection 2-135 ● Cassette • Full (100%~50%) Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS70) Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) Paper Level Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS73) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS72) Detection Lever...
  • Page 190 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection 2-136 ■ Paper Detection ● Cassette If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper Cassette 3 Paper Sensor (PS13) Cassette 4 Paper Sensor (PS14) Sensor is turned OFF.
  • Page 191 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control 2-137 ■ Lifter Control ● Cassette Paper is lifted to the pickup position by the Lifter. Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor(PS68) Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor(PS71) In the machine configuration with the Deck / Cassette set, the Pickup Motor is driven to raise the Lifter to fit the paper level to the height of the pickup position.

  • Page 192: Pickup Retry Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control 2-138 ● Lifter Error Detection In case due to some reason the lifter keep ascending even the Paper Surface Height Sensor is turned ON, the Upper Limit Sensor is provided to prevent damage in this equipment due to the error in ascending.

  • Page 193: Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Basic Movement 2-139 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit 3) When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate, ■...

  • Page 194: Paper Size Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Detection 2-140 ■ Paper Size Detection ■ Paper Detection The setting is performed the Side Guide Plate and size code setting (or irregular size setting When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose assignment) by and the Control Panel Unit.

  • Page 195: Registration Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Pre-registration Control 2-141 Registration Unit Pickup ■ Pre-registration Control Stop position name Paper size Reference sensor Stop position Assembly Pre-registration stop Right Deck Size LTR (215.9mm) Vertical Path Vertical Path Roller 1 Pickup processing time can vary depending on the paper type and paper size in use as well position 1 Sensor1(PS24)

  • Page 196: Registration Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Deceleration Control 2-142 ■ Registration Control ■ Registration Deceleration Control The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be This control reduces speed of Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor (M33) (Registration aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly.

  • Page 197: Registration Acceleration Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Transfer > Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control 2-143 Transfer ■ Registration Acceleration Control The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be ■ Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly.

  • Page 198: Delivery/Reverse Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation 2-144 Delivery/Reverse Unit Speed after Fixing Roller Process ■ Basic Operation Delivery speed Process speed speed ● Face-up Delivery Delivery Motor(M13) 1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned ON to switch the feeding path to the Delivery Assembly side.

  • Page 199: Face-Down Delivery

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation 2-145 ● Face-down Delivery Reverse delivery Reverse delivery speed speed 1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the Delivery Assembly side. Delivery Delivery Motor speed...

  • Page 200: Duplex Unit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Operation 2-146 Duplex Unit Duplex reverse speed Duplex reverse speed ■ Basic Operation Process speed Stop Reverse Motor 1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the Stop (M14) Reverse Assembly side.

  • Page 201: Side Registration Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Side Registration Control 2-147 ■ Side Registration Control Duplex Outlet Roller Side Registration Motor(M16) In the case of printing the 2nd side of the 2-sided print, side registration displacement level is measured to adjust the write start timing and correct side registration.

  • Page 202: Circulation Quantity And Limit

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-148 ■ Circulation quantity and limit The numbers in white background and the numbers in black background show each the first page and second page. ● Less than 314 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4R) Registration stop position Pre-registration Pre-registration...
  • Page 203 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-149 Pre-registration Duplex reverse stop position7 stop position F-2-189 2-149 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit...
  • Page 204 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-150 ● Exceeds 314 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (B4 to LDR inch(431.8)) Registration stop position Registration stop position Duplex stop position Pre-registration stop position 4 Pre-registration Pre-registration stop position 4...
  • Page 205 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit 2-151 Registration stop position F-2-191 2-151 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit...

  • Page 206: Jam Detection

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List 2-152 Jam Detection ■ Jam Code List PS52 PS20 PS67 PS29 PS28 PS64 PS36 PS35 PS65 PS24 PS66 PS19 PS32 PS25 PS21 PS26 PS33 PS22 PS27 F-2-192 2-152 Technology >...
  • Page 207 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List 2-153 ● Jam in Feed System ● Other Jams xx = 01: Delay, 02: Stationary, 0A: Residue Sensor Sensor name Jam type Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect 0B01 SW2 Front Door Open Detection Switch Door Open jam...

  • Page 208: Forced Paper Feed Control

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control 2-154 ■ Forced Paper Feed Control If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected, the paper will be forcedly fed to downstream direction.This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling. :Forced Paper Feed Control F-2-193...

  • Page 209: Servicing

    Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-155 Servicing ■ Periodical Servicing List Expected ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Parts/Area Name Remarks life* None Feed Guide Remove paper lint with lint-free paper and cleaning tool. ■ Consumable Parts Pre-registration Guide Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

  • Page 210: External Auxiliary System

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration 2-156 External Auxiliary System Overview ■ Power Supply Configuration ● Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine 3.3V Main Controller PCB 1 3.3V 3.3V Main Power Switch Front Door Open Multi Door Main Controller PCB 2 Detection Switch...

  • Page 211: Controls

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-157 Controls ● Power Configuration of the Reader Unit ■ Power supply control Motor ● Electric Power Management <Over View> Sensor Electric power shortage is prevented by equating the electric power in the machine. Capacitor for preventing the electric power shortage which is applied to the conventional LED Lamp CMOS PCB...
  • Page 212 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-158 <Control description> display on the Control Panel is OFF. This machine executes electric power management to prevent temporary power shortage. Energy Saver The electric power management detects current value of the entire product with the Current Sensor.
  • Page 213 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-159 ● Distribution of Power and the Switches The power of this machine is supplied to each load side by linking with the following switches, etc. A. 2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt*1) <Environment Switch: OFF>...
  • Page 214 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control 2-160 B. 2-dimensional shading ON *1] <Environment Switch: OFF> Main Power sleep mode (low energy sleep mode (high energy Mode WarmUp(Recovery) Standby/Energy Saver Copy/Print consumption)*3 consumption)*3 Main SW Switch Cassette SW Drum Heater...
  • Page 215 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup 2-161 <Environment Control> ■ Quick Startup Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to power continues.

  • Page 216: Quick Start

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup 2-162 possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts up normally (even quick startup is ON).

  • Page 217: Fan Control

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control 2-163 ■ Fan Control ● Location of Fans ● Airflow FM17 FM17 FM16 Developing Assembly FM33 FM33 FM31 FM31 FM30 FM30 FM32 FM42 FM32 IH power supply unit FM41 Power Supply FM41 FM42 FM40...

  • Page 218: Counter Control

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control 2-164 ● Fan Sequence ■ Counter control Count-up timing differs according to the following. WAIT Power DEEP NAME INTR STBY LSTR PRINT saving Sleep • Print mode (1-sided page, 2nd side of 2-sided page, 1st side of 2-sided page) Primary Charging Air-supply Fan •...
  • Page 219 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control 2-165 Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country Target Target Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 code code...

  • Page 220: Servicing

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts 2-166 Servicing ■ When Replacing Parts ● DC Controller PCB ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back Parts name Parts Number Piece...

  • Page 221: Troubleshooting

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-167 ■ Troubleshooting 1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring. ● Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.
  • Page 222 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > Troubleshooting 2-168 3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the dents formed by tightening the screws.

  • Page 223: Meap

    Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication) 2-169 MEAP An example of the LDAP server management screen Changes ■ LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication) LDAP authentication has been added to the server authentication method using Single Sign- On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H).

  • Page 224: Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen

    * 64-bit version is not supported. 2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server) • The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory. F-2-214 • The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low line), and % (percent).

  • Page 225: Ldap Authentication

    Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users 2-171 ■ PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users Note: As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC logon name (pre-Windows 2000)"...

  • Page 226: Preparation For Using Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS 2-172 Preparation for Using SMS Note: • The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer. To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings •...

  • Page 227: Settings On The Device Side

    Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-173 ■ Settings on the Device Side Note: When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management ● Network configuration process Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button. In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings (This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI.
  • Page 228 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-174 ● Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL 2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key and Certificate Settings ].
  • Page 229 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-175 5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button. 6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ]. F-2-224 Default Key Settings 1) Click [ Preferences ] >...
  • Page 230 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-176 2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button. Installing a server certificate (reference information) When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key for SSL, "Certificate Error"...
  • Page 231 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-177 3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab. 5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and then click the [ Browse ] button.
  • Page 232 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-178 7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification 9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing Authorities"...

  • Page 233: Network Port Settings

    Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-179 ● Network Port Settings 4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443.

  • Page 234: How To Check The Serial Number

    Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline 2-180 Login to SMS ■ How to Check the Serial Number When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some ■ Outline cases. SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication).

  • Page 235: When Sms Cannot Be Accessed

    Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed 2-181 ■ When SMS Cannot Be Accessed ● If login is not possible due to exclusive control Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already ●...

  • Page 236: How To Deal With A Message "Certificate Error" That Appears At The Time Of Access

    Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline 2-182 Installing an MEAP Application ● If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS ■...

  • Page 237: Procedure To Install Applications

    Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications 2-183 ■ Procedure to install applications CAUTION: 1) Long on to SMS. • You cannot install only the license. 2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu. •...
  • Page 238 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications 2-184 5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button. Note: There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI.

  • Page 239: Resource Information

    To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device. http://www.canon.com/lms/license/ F-2-258 2-185...

  • Page 240: Meap Specifications

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-186 MEAP Specifications Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP ■...
  • Page 241 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-187 Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks iR-ADV 6075 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, Ver.20.xx or later iR-ADV C9280 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, iR-ADV 6065 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,...
  • Page 242 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-188 MEAP Specifications List Description Description Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print server unit status) MEAP basic function Reserved MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added...

  • Page 243: Meap Application Management

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application 2-189 MEAP Application Management Description SFP basic functions ■ Outline AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.
  • Page 244 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application 2-190 4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [ ● Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application Stopped ].

  • Page 245: Managing The License File

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-191 1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu. ■ Managing the License File 2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has ●...

  • Page 246: Procedure Adding A License File

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-192 ● Procedure adding a license file 4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install. 1) Log on to SMS. 2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.

  • Page 247: Procedure Disabling A License File (Suspending A License)

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-193 ● Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) 2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable. CAUTION: • Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.

  • Page 248: Procedure Downloading / Removing An Invalidated License File

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-194 4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button. ● Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file Note: The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device (with the same device serial number).
  • Page 249 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-195 5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button. 7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button. F-2-278 F-2-277 6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by 8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.
  • Page 250 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions 2-196 ■ Other License File Management Functions 2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense). ●...

  • Page 251: Other License File Management Functions

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions 2-197 5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ]. 8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ]. F-2-287 F-2-284 9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation...

  • Page 252: Enhanced System Application Management

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-198 Enhanced System Application Management ■ About Login Service The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is ■ Outline booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System [ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging Management ] page.
  • Page 253 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-199 Differences from conventional SSO ● Environment confirmation Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements Domain B Domain C Domain B Domain C needed in each login service.
  • Page 254 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-200 ● Setting the Authentication Method ● Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods. SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen.
  • Page 255 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-201 2) Restart the device. 5) Restart the device. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. 3) Disable Depart ID Management.
  • Page 256 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-202 SSO-H user registration information import screen 8) Check that the device can be logged in. (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information] Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).

  • Page 257: Local Device Authentication

    SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter “SA”) to authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers (users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this function. F-2-301 2-203 Technology >...

  • Page 258: Server Authentication (Active Directory Authentication)

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-204 ■ Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) CAUTION: ● Outline Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H.
  • Page 259 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-205 Settings for access mode in sites Note: Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as • The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net. detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.

  • Page 260: Server Authentication (Ldap Authentication)

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) 2-206 1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories. ■ Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H.

  • Page 261: Steps To Change Login Services

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services 2-207 ■ Server authentication and local device authentication 2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click [SWITCH] button for the login service to be used. It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication"...

  • Page 262: Login Service Installation Procedure

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure 2-208 ■ Login Service Installation Procedure CAUTION: Follow the procedure show below to install login services. In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS 1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] >...

  • Page 263: Login Service Uninstallation Procedure

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure 2-209 3) Click [ Install] button. ■ Login Service Uninstallation Procedure Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services. In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status). Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped.

  • Page 264: System Application Management

    Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication 2-210 System Application Management Note: If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS. of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.

  • Page 265: Rls Authentication

    RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name • In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication.
  • Page 266 Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication 2-212 Note: CAUTION: SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI. In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login gain access to SMS.

  • Page 267: Setting The Method To Login To Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-213 Setting the method to login to SMS ● Setting for login by Password Authentication The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows. ■...

  • Page 268: Setting For Login By Rls Authentication

    Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-214 4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password ● Setting for login by RLS Authentication Authentication) to check if the status is changed. The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
  • Page 269 Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-215 4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote CAUTION: Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed. In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login method.

  • Page 270: Initial Display Languages Of Sms

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information 2-216 MEAP Application System Information ■ Initial Display Languages of SMS SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the ■ Outline drop down list on a login page.

  • Page 271: Display Of System Information Details

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application 2-217 ■ Display of System Information Details ■ Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.

  • Page 272: Content Of Meap System Information

    Application Version: 1.0.0 The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen. Status: Resolved Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Application Information Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed • Application Name • Description • Version •...

  • Page 273: Check License

    Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File 2-219 Check License 3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the information of the target application. ■ Outline You can check the contents of the license file. ■...

  • Page 274: Changing Sms Login Password

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline 2-220 Changing SMS Login Password MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management ■ Outline ■ Outline You can change the password for logging into SMS. If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"...

  • Page 275: Advantages Obtained When Using The Services

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management 2-221 ■ Advantages Obtained When Using the Services ■ MEAP Application Setting Information Management By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively Application Setting Information Management can be deleted.

  • Page 276: Meap Application Log Management

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management 2-222 ■ MEAP Application Log Management 4) To download the logs The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file. The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted.

  • Page 277: Maintenance

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST 2-223 Maintenance ● Backup Item Automatically Copied The following data are backed up using SST: ■ Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.

  • Page 278: Procedure For Backing Up The Meap Application Area Using Sst

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-224 ● Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices ■ Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application.
  • Page 279 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-225 4) Connecting the device using SST 6) Saving backup data When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button. Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK] to save the backup data on the PC.

  • Page 280: Procedures To Restore Backup Data

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data 2-226 ■ Procedures to Restore Backup Data CAUTION: 1) Connecting to the device Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up using SST to recovery of the data.

  • Page 281: Formatting And Replacing The Hdd

    MEAP application installed. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question.

  • Page 282: Hdd Replacement Procedure

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD 2-228 ● HDD replacement procedure ● If the MEAP application area can be backed up Outline If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD, The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.

  • Page 283: Meap Safe Mode (Level 2)

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 2-229 ■ MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 3) Press button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click [MEAPSAFE] button. ● Outline Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.

  • Page 284: How To Cancel Meap Safe Mode

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 2-230 ● How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode Note: 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2. If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title bar of the browser.

  • Page 285: Collection Of Meap Console Logs

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-231 4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK] ■ Collection of MEAP Console Logs button. ● Overview When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
  • Page 286 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-232 3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button. PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used) 1) Install the terminal software on the PC. 2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button. F-2-371 4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value F-2-374...
  • Page 287 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-233 4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the 6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save "OK"...
  • Page 288 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-234 9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly. Note: While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu. Comment to Log...
  • Page 289 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-235 PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used) 4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen. 1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.

  • Page 290: Using Usb Devices

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-236 8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect. ■ Using USB Devices ● USB Driver Two types of USB drivers While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as “MEAP driver”), not only MEAP driver but also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as “system driver”) can be used in iR-ADV series.
  • Page 291 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-237 Operating mode Software keyboard Conventional USB System driver Note: settings [Use MEAP application You can display/check the used driver setting at “USB device report print” described keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP driver as USB input (System Driver/ below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from...
  • Page 292 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-238 Specifications for the use of USB keyboards ● Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
  • Page 293 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-239 4) Press [OK] button to restart this device. 3) Press button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT] button. F-2-400 4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field. F-2-398 ●...
  • Page 294 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-240 Example of output result C : Configure The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is ******************************** active. *** USB Device report print *** ******************************** I : Interface The interface information of a USB device is shown.

  • Page 295: Integrated Authentication Function

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function 2-241 The content of MEAP preferred device information ■ Integrated Authentication Function Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with ● Sharing the Authentication Information MEAP application.
  • Page 296 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function 2-242 ● Comparison of Functions Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button. Volatile Credential Persistent Credential Registered Character strings and arbitrary Character strings only User ID/Password/ information Java objects Domain/Arbitrary character strings...

  • Page 297: Points To Note When Enabling The [Quick Startup Settings For Main Power] Setting

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting 2-243 ■ Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours" A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay Main Power] Setting execution".

  • Page 298: Remedy To Be Performed When The Device Has Become Unable To Be Logged In

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-244 ■ Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID Management in the following cases: Unable to Be Logged in •...
  • Page 299 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-245 ● Remedy 3) Disable Depart ID Management. In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management] If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password, >...
  • Page 300 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-246 6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H. 7) Enable Depart ID Management. Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] >...

  • Page 301: Reference Material

    Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined (License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license Application) word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let] System) access numbers. derived from Applet/Service.
  • Page 302 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material 2-248 Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that The kit containing information and tools required for software development. (MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network (Software...

  • Page 303: Option For Exclusive Individual Measure

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure 2-249 ■ Option for exclusive individual measure 4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. ●...
  • Page 304 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure 2-250 ● Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen 3) Press [ANIM-SW] button. (level 2) In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/ JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner).

  • Page 305: Embedded Rds

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions 2-251 Embedded RDS ■ Features and benefits E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.

  • Page 306: Limitations

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function 2-252 Limitations Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry When the following service call error is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG ■ Service Mode Menu Transmission Function HV-STS Error codes for transmission: E000 - E00F, // Fixing 1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.

  • Page 307: Service Cautions

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions 2-253 Service cautions NOTE: *The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result. 1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits) setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.

  • Page 308: E-Rds Setup

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance 2-254 E-RDS Setup (3) Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this ■ Confirmation and preparation in advance machine network related settings. See Users’...

  • Page 309: Steps To E-Rds Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-255 ■ Steps to E-RDS settings (2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button. NOTE: This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
  • Page 310 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-256 4. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. CAUTION: 5. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS]. The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.

  • Page 311: Steps To Service Call Button Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-257 If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the ■ Steps to Service Call button settings "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed. ●...
  • Page 312 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-258 3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1 NOTE: or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.) When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter NOTE:...
  • Page 313 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-259 ● Steps for service call request 4. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button. Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call. NOTE: E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to 1.
  • Page 314 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-260 ● Steps for service call cancellation 4. "The request has been canceled." is displayed. To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below. 1.

  • Page 315: Steps To Service Browser Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings 2-261 ■ Steps to Service Browser settings 3. Reboot this machine. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS]. 2.

  • Page 316: Initializing E-Rds Settings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-262 ■ Initializing E-RDS settings It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the No.1 default value. Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail? A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!"...
  • Page 317 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-263 No.5 No.10 Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic"...

  • Page 318: Troubleshooting

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-264 Troubleshooting No.14 Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this No.1 machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG! this machine is turned ON? Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
  • Page 319 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-265 (b) Touch the [Up] button. F-2-452 F-2-454 3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network. Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network. (c) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down Does this machine respond? in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.
  • Page 320 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-266 Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG) 3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02) 2) Select [COPIER] >...
  • Page 321 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-267 No.3 No.7 Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Device is not ready, try later" in error details of COM- Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is LOG list.

  • Page 322: Error Code And Strings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-268 Error code and strings No.10 Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs. The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen. Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COM- (Here, "server"...
  • Page 323 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-269 Code Error strings Cause Remedy Code Error strings Cause Remedy 8xxx 0004 Operation is not Method which E-RDS is not Contact help desk 20 8xxx 2003 Network is not Communication attempted Check the network supported supporting attempted.
  • Page 324 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-270 Code Error strings Cause Remedy Code Error strings Cause Remedy 27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate • No route certificate installed • Install the latest device 35 xxxx xxxx Device internal An internal error, such as Turn the device OFF/ ON.

  • Page 325: Updater

    By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to Firmware Upload Updater Firmware Canon Inc. manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater, regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in imageRUNNER...

  • Page 326: Installing Meap Application/System Option

    If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or Updater. service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application Firmware Upload Updater Firmware Canon Inc. or a system option. Installing MEAP Application imageRUNNER ADVANCE Service...

  • Page 327: System Configuration

    Upload Application/License 1) Enter LAN Business Updater Firmware Application Application Group eRDS Firmware Canon Inc. 4) Transmit LF imageRUNNER ADVANCE Service Command for Firmware Distribution Technician LAN: License Access Number Canon Inc. If a customer enters LAN LF: License File...

  • Page 328: List Of Functions

    Technology > Updater > Distribution Flow > Firmware Installation Flow 2-274 List of Functions Distribution Flow ■ Firmware Installation Flow The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater. Service User Remote UGW- Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods. Category Function Mode...

  • Page 329: Meap Application/System Option Installation Flow

    Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-275 Limitations and Cautions ■ MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided. ■ Limitations Be sure to use the user mode to install. Changing Date/Time on Device : Operator of each company : User operation...
  • Page 330 Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-276 Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed. This is the Updater-specific specification. Job/Function Receiving Printing Queued print Sending Queued send type jobs...

  • Page 331: Overview Of Preparation

    Technology > Updater > Setting Sales Company’s HQ 2-277 Overview of Preparation Setting Sales Company’s HQ The following should be prepared before using Updater. When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s • For updating of firmware HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS.

  • Page 332: Network Settings

    Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server 2-278 Network Settings ■ Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server. ■ Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection 1.
  • Page 333 Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server 2-279 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.

  • Page 334: Communication Test

    Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Communication Test 2-280 ■ Communication Test 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. NOTE: CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the Embedded RDS.

  • Page 335: Enabling Ugw Link

    Technology > Updater > Enabling UGW Link 2-281 Enabling UGW Link 5. Press [Yes] button. When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...

  • Page 336: Enabling [Update Firmware] Button Of User Mode

    Technology > Updater > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode 2-282 Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.

  • Page 337: Enabling [Manual Update] Button Of User Mode (Remote Ui)

    Technology > Updater > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) 2-283 Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.

  • Page 338: System Management Operations

    Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting URL of Distribution Server 2-284 System Management Operations 4. Press [Settings] button. Various Setting ■ Setting URL of Distribution Server This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server. 1.

  • Page 339: Setting Log Level

    Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting Log Level 2-285 ■ Setting Log Level 4. Press [Settings] button. This section describes how to set system log levels. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel. 2).

  • Page 340: Displaying Logs

    Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > Update Logs 2-286 Displaying Logs 5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list. ■ Update Logs This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs. 1.

  • Page 341: System Logs

    Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs 2-287 4. Press [Select Log Display] button. 6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-507 5. Press [Display Update Logs] button. F-2-509 ■...
  • Page 342 Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs 2-288 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Press [Display System Logs] button. F-2-510 F-2-512 4. Press [Select Log Display] button. 6. Updater internal logs are displayed. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-511 F-2-513 NOTE:...

  • Page 343: Communication Test

    Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test 2-289 Communication Test 4. Press [Test Communication] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1).
  • Page 344 Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test 2-290 6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-517 2-290 Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test...

  • Page 345: Upgrading Updater

    Technology > System Management Operations > Formatting Hard Disk 2-291 Upgrading Updater Formatting Hard Disk The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP "Overview"...

  • Page 346: How To Replace Controller Boards

    Technology > System Management Operations > How to Replace Devices 2-292 How to Replace Controller Boards How to Replace Devices The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced. All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Overview of Preparation" •...

  • Page 347: Faq On Installing Firmware

    Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing Firmware 2-293 FAQ on Installing Firmware No.4 Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the No.1 firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS? download”...

  • Page 348: Faq On Installing Meap Application/System Option

    Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option 2-294 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option No.9 Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download? No.1 A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown. Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free space? A: An error message is shown.

  • Page 349: Faq On General Matters Of Updater

    Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on General Matters of Updater 2-295 FAQ on General Matters of Updater No.2 Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side? No.1 A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode. Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method? •...

  • Page 350: Dcm

    Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-296 2) Reboot the Host machine. 3) Import the DCM data of the user mode. • As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
  • Page 351 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-297 ● Import/Export All from Remote UI Note: The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the setting in the following service mode.
  • Page 352 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-298 The following cases may be possible for the Import All function. Setting Information Case Case Case Case A:Importing all to your machine (Restoring the settings information to your machine for Change Energy Saver Mode Yes Yes Yes backups) Silent Mode Time...
  • Page 353 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-299 Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case SNMP Settings Yes Yes Yes Scanner Noise Settings Yes Yes No Dedicated Port Settings Yes Yes Yes Streak Prevention Yes Yes No Use Spool Function Yes Yes Yes LTRR/STMT Original Selection...
  • Page 354 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-300 Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case Default Subject Yes Yes Yes Store/Access FilesCommon Settings Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply Yes Yes Yes Scan and Store Settings Yes Yes Yes Set Authentication User Dest.
  • Page 355 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-301 Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case Display Log Yes Yes Yes Quick Menu Quick Menu Button File Yes Yes No Audit Log Retrieval Yes Yes Yes Settings Settings Store Key Operation Log Yes Yes Yes MEAP...

  • Page 356: Service Mode Setting Values That Can Be Backed Up By Dcm

    Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-302 ■ Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST MTF2-S2 The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
  • Page 357 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-303 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST MTF-M11 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFS6 COPIER ADJUST...
  • Page 358 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-304 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER FUNCTION 2D-SHADE S-LINE1 COPIER OPTION BODY TEMP-TBL COPIER...
  • Page 359 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-305 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION BODY LPD-PORT COPIER OPTION BODY SPDALDEL COPIER...
  • Page 360 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-306 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION BODY DK4-TURN COPIER OPTION BODY EXT-TBOX COPIER...
  • Page 361 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-307 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER4 COPIER OPTION USER HDCR-DSW COPIER...
  • Page 362 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-308 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z2 SORTER ADJUST RTR-DWB5 SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z1...

  • Page 363: Import/Export By Service Mode (External)

    Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-309 ■ Import/export by service mode (external) Initial screen Large Middle Small Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 SORTER OPTION BUFF-THK SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP1 The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP2...
  • Page 364 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-310 2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP. F-2-521 3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>. F-2-523 5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed. F-2-522 4.
  • Page 365 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-311 9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK. Unmount the USB memory device. Note: It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu. Limitations regarding the DCM data password •...
  • Page 366 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-312 2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed 4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK. 3. Register password 4. Import from external USB memory device 5.
  • Page 367 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-313 6. Select SELECT. 8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->. F-2-534 F-2-536 7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press Note: Specification of file selection display •...
  • Page 368 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-314 11. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-. F-2-538 Note: F-2-540 Specification of file selection display 12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK. •...

  • Page 369: Import/Export By Service Mode (Internal)

    Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-315 ■ Import/export by service mode (internal) 2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>. When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen of service mode, service mode settings can be saved.
  • Page 370 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-316 6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export. F-2-547 7. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-. F-2-545 5.
  • Page 371 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-317 ● Import 3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK. Preparation There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine. Overall flow Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
  • Page 372 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-318 5. Select PASSWD. 7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->. F-2-554 6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected. F-2-556 Note: Specification of file selection display...
  • Page 373 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-319 10. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-. F-2-558 Note: F-2-560 Specification of file selection display • "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed.

  • Page 374: Periodic Service

    Periodic Service ■ Periodical Service Operation Item Periodic Service...

  • Page 375: Periodic Service Periodical Service Operation Item

    Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replacement (Consumable parts) Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection Interval No. Category Part Name Part No Counter Remark Process Primary Charging Assembly FM3-7288 ●...
  • Page 376 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replacement (Consumable parts) Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection Interval No. Category Part Name Part No Counter Remark Image FC8-7160 ● DRBL-1 TR-BLT Formation Transfer Roller FC8-7159 ●...
  • Page 377 Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replacement (Consumable parts) Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection Interval No. Category Part Name Part No Counter Remark Pickup/ Upper Separation Claw FB5-3625 ● DRBL-1 DLV-UCLW Clean this part when it is not replaced.

  • Page 378: Parts Replacement And Clearning

    Parts Replacement and Clearning ■ List of Parts ■ Main Controller ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing ■ Pickup/Feed System ■ External Auxiliary System Parts Replacement and Clearning...

  • Page 379: List Of External / Internal Cover

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover List of Parts Name Reference [1] Upper Cover [2] Upper Left Cover List of External / Internal Cover [3] Operation Panel [4] Upper Right Cover [5] Toner Exchange Cover [6] Front Cover [7] Deck Left Cover...
  • Page 380 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover Name Reference [17] Upper Rear Cover [32] [18] Left Rear Cover [19] Rear Upper Cover [34] [31] [20] Rear Lower Cover [17] [33] [21] Filter Cover [22] Waste Toner Container Cover [30] [23] Right Lower Cover...

  • Page 381: List Of Main Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit List of Main Unit Developing Assembly Laser Scanner Unit Process Unit Waste Toner Feed Unit Fixing Assembly Hopper Unit F-4-3 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit...
  • Page 382 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Name Service Parts No. Reference [1] Waste Toner Feed Unit FM4-0899 "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit"(page 4-168). [2] Laser Scanner Unit FM3-7526 "Removing the Laser Scanner Unit"(page 4-92). [3] Hopper Unit FM4-0879 "Removing the Hopper Unit"(page 4-159).
  • Page 383 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Fixing Feed Unit Right Deck Pickup Unit Left Deck Pickup Unit Outer Delivery Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Vertical Path Unit Registration Unit Cassette 3 Pickup Unit Cassette 4 Pickup Unit ETB Unit Reverse Delivery Unit...
  • Page 384 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Name Service Parts No. Reference [7] Outer Delivery Unit FM3-7379 [8] Fixing Feed Unit [9] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit FM3-7367 [10] Left Deck Pickup Unit FM0-3208 "Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit"(page 4-215). [11] Right Deck Pickup Unit FM0-3207 "Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit"(page 4-216).
  • Page 385 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Drum Drive Unit Controller Box Developing Drive Unit Main Drive Unit Flat Control Panel Unit Vertical Path Cassette ETB Drive Unit Pickup Drive Unit Left Deck Drive Unit F-4-5 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 386 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit Name Service Parts No. Reference [19] Flat Control Panel Unit FM0-1155 [20] Controller Box [21] Drum Drive Unit FM4-0904 "Removing the Drum Drive Unit"(page 4-171). [22] Developing Drive Unit FM3-7386 "Removing the Developing Drive Unit"(page 4-173).

  • Page 387: Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-10 Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts ■ Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts Developing Roller Developing Roller Developing Cylinder Pre-exposure Scraper Pre-exposure Scraper Drum Side Seal (R) Drum Cleaning Blade...
  • Page 388 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-11 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] Developing Roller Developing Assembly "Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller"(page 4-132).
  • Page 389 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-12 Primary Charging Assembly Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Primary Charging Wire Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner...
  • Page 390 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-13 Name Main Unit Service Parts Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] Primary Charging Assembly Process Unit FM3-7288 "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly"(page 4-96). "Primary Charging Assembly"(page 5-7).
  • Page 391 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-14 Transfer Roller ETB Cleaning Blade Brush Roller F-4-8 4-14 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts...
  • Page 392 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-15 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] ETB ETB Unit FC8-7159 "Removing the ETB Unit"(page 4-137). [2] Transfer Roller ETB Unit FC8-7160...
  • Page 393 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-16 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1(THM2) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2(THM3) Fixing Main Thermistor(THM1) Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Insulating Bush Thrust Retainer Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Fixing Roller...
  • Page 394 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-17 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Reference Adjustment during parts raplacement [1] Fixing Sub Thermister 1(THM2) Fixing Assembly FK2-7693 "Removing the Sub Thermistor1"(page 4-192).
  • Page 395 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-18 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Right Deck Pickup Roller Right Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Separation Roller Dustproof Filter Cassette 3 Separation Roller...
  • Page 396 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts 4-19 Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacement [1] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-purpose Pickup Unit "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller"(page 4-205). [2] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi-purpose Pickup Unit "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller"(page 4-206).

  • Page 397: List Of Cleaning Parts

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-20 ■ List of Cleaning Parts Lower side of Developing Assembly Developing Roller Lower side of Developing Cylinder Developing Roller Pre-exposure Scraper Drum Edge Cleaning Unit Plate Drum...
  • Page 398 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-21 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Cleaning Unit Plate Drum Cleaning Unit "Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-119). [2] Pre-exposure Scraper Drum Cleaning Unit "Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-119).
  • Page 399 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-22 Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (R) Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (L) Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate Toner Receptacle Tray Waste Toner Container...
  • Page 400 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-23 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire Primary Charging Assembly "Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-106). [2] Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate Primary Charging Assembly "Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-106).
  • Page 401 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-24 Fixing inlet guide Fixing cleaning web guide Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Fixing Assembly Inner Delivery Roller Fixing oil pan Upper separation claw Fixing Right Stay Dowel Holder Dowel...
  • Page 402 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-25 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Assembly "Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178). [2] Fixing Right Stay Fixing Assembly "Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
  • Page 403 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-26 Registration Unit Feed Guide Right Door Unit Feed Guide Right Lower Door Unit Feed Guide Inner Feed Guide Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide Fixing Feed Unit (Duplex/Rear) Feed Guide F-4-14...
  • Page 404 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-27 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Registration Unit Feed Guide Registration Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207). [2] Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide Reverse Delivery Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
  • Page 405 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-28 Separation Static Eliminator Roller of Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Roller of Right Door Unit Registration Unit Magnet Roller of Right Lower Door Unit Duplex area Cleaning Brush Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit...
  • Page 406 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-29 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Roller of Fixing Feed Unit Fixing Feed Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207). [2] Registration Unit Magnet Registration Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
  • Page 407 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-30 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Pickup Feed Drive Unit PS28 PS24 PS29 PS64 PS67 PS66 PS65 Right Door Unit Fixing Feed Unit F-4-16 4-30 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 408 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-31 Name Main Unit Reference PS24 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Vertical Path Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207). PS28 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit "Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
  • Page 409 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-32 Dust-Proof Glass Laser Scanner Unit F-4-17 4-32 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts...
  • Page 410 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts 4-33 Name Main Unit Reference [1] Dustproof Glass Main Body "Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass"(page 4-95). T-4-17 4-33 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts...

  • Page 411: List Of Fan

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan 4-34 List of Fan FM17 FM16 FM33 FM31 FM30 FM32 IH power supply unit FM41 Power Supply FM42 FM40 FM14 FM15 F-4-18 4-34 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan...
  • Page 412 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan 4-35 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference Primary Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan Product configuration Making Image Exhaust Fan Product configuration Main Controller Cooling Fan Product configuration Paper Cooling Fan Product configuration Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan...

  • Page 413: List Of Clutch / Solenoid

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-36 List of Clutch / Solenoid Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Fixing Feed Unit SL11 Fixing Assembly F-4-19 4-36 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid...
  • Page 414 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-37 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference SL2 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi-purpose Pickup Unit SL5 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid Fixing Feed Unit SL9 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid Fixing Assembly SL11 Left Deck Merging Solenoid Fixing Feed Unit...
  • Page 415 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-38 F-4-20 4-38 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid...
  • Page 416 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid 4-39 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference CL1 Developing Clutch Developing Assembly SL3 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 3 Pickup Unit SL4 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 4 Pickup Unit CL5 Magnet Roller Clutch Hopper Unit...

  • Page 417: List Of Motor

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-40 List of Motor Buffer Assembly Hopper Unit Process Unit ETB Unit Fixing Assembly F-4-21 4-40 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor...
  • Page 418 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-41 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference M3 Fixing Motor Fixing Assembly M6 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Process Unit M7 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Process Unit M10 Toner Supply Motor Hopper Unit...
  • Page 419 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-42 Laser Scanner Unit Fixing Feed Unit Outer Delivery Unit F-4-22 4-42 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor...
  • Page 420 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-43 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference M13 Delivery Motor Outer Delivery Unit M14 Reverse Motor Fixing Feed Unit M16 Side Registration Motor Fixing Feed Unit M18 Duplex Feed Right Motor Fixing Feed Unit M19 Duplex Feed Left Motor...
  • Page 421 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-44 Developing Drive Unit Pickup Feed Unit Drum Drive Unit Cassette Pickup Drive Unit F-4-23 4-44 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor...
  • Page 422 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor 4-45 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference M1 Drum Motor Drum Drive Unit M2 Developing Motor Developing Assembly Drive Unit M4 Right Deck Lifter Motor Cassette Pickup Drive Unit M5 Left Deck Lifter Motor Cassette Pickup Drive Unit M11 Right Deck Pickup Motor...

  • Page 423: List Of Sensor

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-46 List of Sensor Developing Assembly Pickup Feed Drive Unit PS29 PS24 Drum Drive Unit PS51 PS61 PS45 PS52 Right Door Unit PS53 PS96 Fixing Assembly F-4-24 4-46 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 424 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-47 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference PS4 Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor Fixing Assembly PS24 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Vertical Path Unit PS29 Registration Sensor Pickup Feed Drive Unit PS45 Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor Fixing Assembly PS51 Fixing Inlet Sensor...
  • Page 425 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-48 Upper High Voltage Unit Hopper Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Buffer Assembly PS54 UN13 PS23 PS28 PS56 PS64 PS55 PS67 PS35 PS66 PS25 PS36 PS65 PS31 Outer Delivery Unit Fixing Feed Unit Vertical Path Unit F-4-25...
  • Page 426 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-49 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor Vertical Path Unit PS23 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Pickup Unit PS25 Vertical Path Sensor 2 Vertical Path Unit PS28 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Pickup Unit...
  • Page 427 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-50 Cassette1 Pickup Unit PS19 PS32 Cassette1 Pickup Unit Cassette2 Pickup Unit Cassette3 Pickup Unit PS94 PS10 Cassette2 Pickup Unit PS12 PS33 PS95 PS68 PS17 PS20 PS47 PS21 PS26 PS11 PS48...
  • Page 428 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor 4-51 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference PS3 Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit PS6 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor Right Deck Unit PS7 Right Deck Paper Sensor Right Deck Unit PS8 Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor...

  • Page 429: List Of Switch

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch 4-52 List of Switch Waste Toner Unit Power Supply Unit SW10 F-4-27 4-52 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch...
  • Page 430 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch 4-53 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference SW1 Power Switch Product configuration SW2 Front Door Open Detection Switch Product configuration SW3 Environment Switch Product configuration SW4 Cassette Heater Switch Product configuration SW5 Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch Waste Toner Unit...

  • Page 431: List Of Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-54 List of PCB PCB50 Fixing Feed Unit PCB51 PCB13 Controller Unit PCB9 PCB4 PCB2 PCB34 PCB1 PCB25 PCB29 PCB3 PCB6(100V) PCB5 PCB7(200V) PCB8 PCB33 PCB17(100V) PCB18(200V) Power Supply Unit PCB30 PCB31 F-4-28...
  • Page 432 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-55 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Reference PCB1 DC Controller PCB Product configuration FM0-4158 "DC Controller PCB"(page 5-12). PCB2 Main Driver PCB Product configuration FM4-1083 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB Product configuration...
  • Page 433 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-56 Upper High Voltage Unit Laser Scanner Unit PCB32 PCB12 PCB35 PCB26 PCB11 PCB10 PCB36 PCB15 PCB54 PCB24 PCB23 PCB19 PCB20 Process Unit PCB27(200V) Process Unit PCB28(100V) F-4-29 4-56 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 434 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB 4-57 Name Main Unit Service Parts No. Adjustment during parts replacement Refernce PCB10 Fixing power Supply PCB (100V, 120V) Product configuration FM2-3648 PCB10 Fixing power Supply PCB (230V) Product configuration FM4-1099 PCB11 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB...

  • Page 435: Heater,Others

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others 4-58 Heater,others UN75 EPC1 Process Unit THM2 THM3 THM1 Power Supply Unit Fixing Assembly CB1001 CB1002 CB1003 CB1004 F-4-30 4-58 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others...
  • Page 436 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others 4-59 Name Main Unit Adjustment during parts replacement Reference Drum Heater Process Unit Pre-exposure LED Process Unit Multi Cassette Heater Product configuration Fixing Heater Fixing Assembly Fixing Thermal Switch 1 Fixing Assembly THM1 Fixing Main Thermistor...

  • Page 437: Connector List

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-60 Connector List F-4-31 4-60 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 438 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-61 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J401 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J518 PCB5 Relay PCB J411 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J126 PCB2 Main Driver PCB...
  • Page 439 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-62 F-4-32 4-62 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 440 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-63 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J101 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J515 PCB5 Relay PCB J102 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J2009 Delivery Motor J103...
  • Page 441 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-64 F-4-33 4-64 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 442 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-65 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J111 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3097 J3501 PCB11 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB J112 PCB2 Main Driver PCB...
  • Page 443 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-66 F-4-34 4-66 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 444 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-67 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J201 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J516 PCB5 Relay PCB J211 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J2050 Left Deck Pickup Motor J211...
  • Page 445 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-68 F-4-35 4-68 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 446 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-69 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J223 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3128 J2054 PS25 Vertical Path Sensor2 J223 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3635 J2055...
  • Page 447 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-70 F-4-36 4-70 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 448 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-71 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J310 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J3233 J3002 J517 PCB5 Relay PCB J311 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J100 PCB9...
  • Page 449 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-72 F-4-37 4-72 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 450 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-73 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J501 PCB5 Relay PCB PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 J502 PCB5 Relay PCB J3237 J9040 DECK LATTICE...
  • Page 451 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-74 F-4-38 4-74 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 452 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-75 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J601 PCB6,7 AC Driver PCB PCB25 Choke Coil PCB J602 PCB6,7 AC Driver PCB J802 PCB17,18 Noise Filter...
  • Page 453 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-76 F-4-39 4-76 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 454 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-77 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS J801 PCB17,18 Noise Filter CB1001 Leakage Breaker J801 PCB17,18 Noise Filter CB1002 Leakage Breaker J801 PCB17,18 Noise Filter...
  • Page 455 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-78 F-4-40 4-78 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List...
  • Page 456 Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List 4-79 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name REMARKS PCB50 Main Controller PCB 1 Voice Guidance Kit-F2 PCB50 Main Controller PCB 1 USB Device Port-A2 PCB50 Main Controller PCB 1...

  • Page 457: Main Controller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-80 Main Controller <Procedure> 1) Route the removed cable to the open space and remove the Main Controller PCB 1. Edge Saddle Removing Main Controller PCB 1 USB Cable <Preparation>...
  • Page 458 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1 4-81 3) Remove the Flash PCB and the TPM PCB. <Actions after Parts Replacement> • 2 Screws 1. Install the following parts removed from the old PCB to the new PCB. •...

  • Page 459: Removing Main Controller Pcb 2

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-82 Removing Main Controller PCB 2 <Processing when replacing the parts> 1) Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB. <Processing before replacing the parts> •...
  • Page 460 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-83 <Preparation> <Procedure> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Right). (Refer to "Removing Main Controller PCB 1") Remove the Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Remove the Main Controller PCB 1. (Refer to page 4-80) •...
  • Page 461 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-84 <Actions after Parts Replacement> 1. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2. 1) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch. 2) The restore of backup data: When Download Menu is displayed, connect USB memory to the main body.
  • Page 462 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-85 4-85 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...
  • Page 463 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-86 4-86 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...
  • Page 464 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-87 4-87 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...
  • Page 465 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-88 4-88 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...
  • Page 466 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-89 4-89 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...
  • Page 467 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-90 4-90 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...
  • Page 468 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4-91 4-91 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 2...

  • Page 469: Removing The Laser Scanner Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 4-92 Laser Exposure System 2. Removing the Right Cover. NOTE: Removing the Laser Scanner Unit Laser Scanner Unit can be removed without removing the Right Cover. Howerver, removing the Right Cover is recommended here for better operability.
  • Page 470 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 4-93 2-4) Remove the E-ring to remove the Door Link. CAUTION: To prevent falling of Right Cover, hold the Right Cover to remove the Hinge Pins. <Procedure>...
  • Page 471 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 4-94 3) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector. 5) Hook the wire of the Laser Scanner Unit to the hook of the main body. F-4-60 F-4-58 4) Pull out the Laser Scanner Unit halfway.

  • Page 472: Cleaning The Dust Collecting Glass

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass 4-95 Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass 7) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit. <Preparation> CAUTION: 1) Open the Front Cover. Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit, check that the hooking wire of the unit is not 2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly.

  • Page 473: Removing The Primary Charging Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 4-96 Image Formation System 1) While pushing the Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, pull out the Primary Charging Assembly. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly CAUTION: When removing the Primary Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of the <Preparation>...

  • Page 474: Removing The Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left) 4-97 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner <Processing after replacing the parts> 1) Clear the parts counter for the Primary Charging Assembly. Holder (Right/Left) 2) Output halftone image in service mode.
  • Page 475 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left) 4-98 <Procedure> 1) Remove the Shield Plate (Right). When removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Left), remove the Shield Plate (Left). CAUTION: •...
  • Page 476 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left) 4-99 4) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right) in the direction of the arrow. CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Be sure to push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the CAUTION: Claw.

  • Page 477: Replacing The Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-100 Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 3) Loosen the 4 screws fixing the Motor Unit in the front. Screws <Preparation> 1. Open the Front Cover. 2.
  • Page 478 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-101 6) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.1mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire 9) After setting the wire 35 times around, pass through B part. After turning over the Primary Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.
  • Page 479 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-102 10) Cut the extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers. 13) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the 11) Loosen the 4 screws and tighten the screw until the tension of the Grid Wire is uniformed.

  • Page 480: Replacing The Primary Charging Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 4-103 Replacing the Primary Charging Wire CAUTION: Be sure to move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) until they stop and tighten the screws. NOTE: Replacement procedure is the same between the Primary Charging Wire (Left) and the Primary Charging Wire (Right).
  • Page 481 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 4-104 <Procedure> 3) Remove the Charging Wire from the protrusion and the groove of the Positioning Block at <Removing the Charging Wire> the front side. 1) Remove the Sheet. Protrusion Groove Charging...
  • Page 482 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 4-105 5) Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers. 9) Hook the Charging Wire to the rear groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block and 6) Hook the ring to the front protrusion of the Positioning Block to hook the Charging Wire to hold the edge of the Charging Wire Tension Spring with tweezers to hook it to the charging the groove.

  • Page 483: Cleaning The Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 4-106 Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 3) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the left side with lint-free paper moistened with water.

  • Page 484: Removing The Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 4-107 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 1) Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") CAUTION: When removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of <Procedure>...

  • Page 485: Removing The Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder 4-108 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation Cleaner Holder Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and install it horizontally.
  • Page 486 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder 4-109 2) Turn the Gear by hand to move the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front. CAUTION:Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.
  • Page 487 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder 4-110 3) Pinch the Hook and turn it in the direction of the arrow to remove the Pre-transfer Charging CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation Assembly Cleaner Holder.

  • Page 488: Replacing The Pre-Transfer Charging Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 4-111 Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 1) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear). NOTE: The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part. <Preparation>...
  • Page 489 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 4-112 5) Hook the ring to the rear charging electrode of the Pre-charging Assembly and put the ring 8) Hold the tip of the Spring with tweezers and hook the Charging Wire to the groove to hook through the rear groove and the sponge groove.

  • Page 490: Cleaning The Pre-Transfer Charging Wire

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit 4-113 Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Removing the Process Unit <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Front Cover. 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.
  • Page 491 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit 4-114 CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation When installing the Process Unit, fit the 3 grooves at the edge of the Drum Shaft with Be sure to fit the Drum Cleaning Unit to the rail on the host machine and install it the 3 protrusions of the Drum Fixation Cylinder to install the Drum Shaft Fixing Screw.

  • Page 492: Cleaning The Process Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Process Unit 4-115 Cleaning the Process Unit 2) Clean the rear side of the Process Unit with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 2.

  • Page 493: Removing The Drum Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit 4-116 Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit CAUTION: <Preparation> When installing the Drum Cleaning Unit, clean the area shown with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 494: Removing The Drum Cleaning Blade

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade 4-117 Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") Procedure differs according to the temperature inside the machine. Be sure to perform the 2.
  • Page 495 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade 4-118 2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit • 5 Screws (to loosen) 1. Wipe out the toner on both edges of the Drum Cleaning Unit before installation. 2.

  • Page 496: Cleaning The Drum Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit 4-119 Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit 2) Clean the 2 Pre-exposure Plastic Films of the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit with lint-free paper. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 2.

  • Page 497: Replacing The Pre-Exposure Plastic Film

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film 4-120 Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film 3) Crumb toner clusters in the toner collection area and then clean it. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 2.

  • Page 498: Removing The Drum Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit 4-121 Removing the Drum Unit 1) Remove the Drum Retainer Plate (tentative name). • 3 Screws <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 499: Removing The Photosensitive Drum

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-122 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 1) Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly”) 2.
  • Page 500 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-123 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater. 4) Remove the Heater Control PCB Unit. Drum Heater F-4-132 F-4-131 NOTE: Serial ID of the drum is written on the seal inside the drum. F-4-133 4-123 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...
  • Page 501 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4-124 CAUTION: NOTE: If the yellow marker is not aligned with the protrusion, the following control cannot be • Align the yellow marker of the drum with the hole position of the unit when installing executed properly.

  • Page 502: Cleaning Photosensitive Drum

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning Photosensitive Drum 4-125 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum 4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover. 1) Moisten lint-free paper with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions ; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of the drum cleaning powder (FY9-6024) on the lint-free paper.

  • Page 503: Cleaning The Drum Edges

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum edges 4-126 Cleaning the Drum edges 4) Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10 cm), and repeat the step 1 through 3 until the entire area of the surface has been cleaned. <Preparation>...

  • Page 504: Removing The Cleaner Separation Claw

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Side Seal 4-127 Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw Removing the Side Seal <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 505: Removing The Developing Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly 4-128 Removing the Developing Assembly 2) Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the new Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it uniformly with lint-free paper. 1) Place paper underneath the Developing Assembly.
  • Page 506 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly 4-129 CAUTION:How to Hold the Developing Assembly CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Developing Assembly When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing Before installing the Developing Assembly, check that the Buffer Shutter is not open.
  • Page 507 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly 4-130 • As shown in the figure, hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right • Install the Developing Assembly horizontally by following the rail. and left sides of the Developing Assembly to the rail of the host machine.

  • Page 508: Cleaning The Developing Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly 4-131 Cleaning the Developing Assembly 3) Remove toner in the main body. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-128) <Procedure> 1) Clean the 2 Developing Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating them.

  • Page 509: Removing The Developing Cylinder And The Developing Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-132 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing 2-3) Remove the Developing Assembly Front Cover. • 3 Screws Roller <Preparation> 1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-128) 2.
  • Page 510 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-133 Points to Caution at Installation: Points to Caution at Installation: Since white lines may occur on the image, go through the following steps to match the Check that the long hole of the Sleeve Bias Plate is fitted with the hole of phase of the Sleeve Bias Plate and Developing Cylinder Blade.
  • Page 511 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-134 Points to Caution at Installation: Find the position in which either scale of Sleeve Bias Plate is most matched with one of the Developing Cylinder Blade scales. (If the Developing Cylinder Blade is not marked with scales, put a mark on the Developing Cylinder Blade at a point that matches one of the scales on the Sleeve Bias Plate and use the point as a reference point.)
  • Page 512 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-135 2-5) Lift the left side to remove the Developing Cylinder Blade in the direction of the arrow. O Ring Developing • 2 Bosses Roller Spacer C Ring...
  • Page 513 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4-136 3) Remove the Bearing to remove the Developing Cylinder. CAUTION: How to Install the C Ring When installing the C Rings removed in step 2 and 3, be sure to perform the following to fit the C Rings into the groove of the Developing Cylinder securely.

  • Page 514: Removing The Etb Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit 4-137 Removing the ETB Unit 1-3) Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. <Preparation>...
  • Page 515 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit 4-138 <Procedure> 2) Hold the 2 Handles to remove the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow. 1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover. •...

  • Page 516: Removing The Etb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB 4-139 Removing the ETB 2) Set up the ETB Unit to remove the Roller Unit from the ETB. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 2.

  • Page 517: Cleaning The Etb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the ETB 4-140 Cleaning the ETB <Processing when replacing the parts> 1) Clear the ETB control counter. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>TR-BLT) <Preparation> Parts counter (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>TR-BLT) is also cleared coincidentally. 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to “Removing the ETB”) 2.

  • Page 518: Removing The Transfer Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller 4-141 Removing the Transfer Roller 2) Remove the Transfer Roller Shaft Support from the Transfer Roller. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 2.

  • Page 519: Removing The Etb Cleaning Blade

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4-142 Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade Removing the ETB Brush Roller <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 1.
  • Page 520 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4-143 2) Remove the Connection Gear and the N-ring from the ETB Brush Roller. CAUTION: • Be sure to keep in contact with the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer Guide.
  • Page 521 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4-144 4) Remove the Shaft Support from the ETB Brush Roller. • 1 N-ring Shaft Support ETB Brush Roller Shaft Support F-4-183 4-144 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller...

  • Page 522: Removing The Waste Toner Container

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container 4-145 Removing the Waste Toner Container <Processing when replacing the parts> 1) Set a new Waste Toner Container. 1) Remove the Right Rear Lower Cover. 2) Clear the waste toner counter.(COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WST-TNR) •...

  • Page 523: Removing The Drum Heater

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater 4-146 Removing the Drum Heater 1) Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light. <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.

  • Page 524: Removing The Primary Charging Shutter Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 4-147 Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater. <Preparation> Drum Heater 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 3.
  • Page 525 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 4-148 2) Move down the Primary Charging Assembly to remove the Shield Plate (Right). 4) Install the Shield Plate (Right). • 2 Screws • 2 Screws 5) Remove the Shield Plate (Left).
  • Page 526 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 4-149 7) Install the Shield Plate (Left). <Installation Method> • 2 Screws CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation Be careful not to get the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire to install it to the CAUTION: Cleaner Claw.

  • Page 527: Removing The Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit 4-150 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter CAUTION: Unit Be careful not to remove the screw and the Screw Gear when removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
  • Page 528 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit 4-151 <Installation Method> CAUTION: 1) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit. When installing the Motor Unit, fit the PCB into the slot. • 3 Screws F-4-202 F-4-200 2) Pull the Shutter with your fingers to hook it to the Cleaner Unit.

  • Page 529: Removing The Drum Brush Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Brush Roller 4-152 Removing the Drum Brush Roller CAUTION:Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate Be sure to check that the rear pin is fit into the frame hole. CAUTION: 4) Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.

  • Page 530: Removing The Etb Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4-153 Removing the ETB Drive Unit 2) Remove the 2 Gears and the 2 Bearings. • 3 E-rings <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 2.
  • Page 531 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4-154 2) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover. 3) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Cover. • 2 Screws • 3 Screws • 1 Claw F-4-211 F-4-209 CAUTION: CAUTION:...
  • Page 532 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4-155 4) Remove the Duct. 5) Remove the ETB Drive Unit. • 2 Screws • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • 1 Connector • Harness F-4-214 F-4-213 CAUTION: When installing, turn the gear so that the gear is engaged.

  • Page 533: Removing The Transfer Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator 4-156 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit") 1.
  • Page 534 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator 4-157 2) Remove the Post-transfer Guide. 3) Remove the Separation Guide Reinforcing Plate. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws • 2 Springs F-4-220 4) Remove the Post-transfer Static Eliminator. F-4-219 CAUTION: Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the Post-transfer Guide.

  • Page 535: Removing The Toner Receptacle Tray

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray 4-158 Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray CAUTION: <Preparation> 1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install. 1. Open the Front Upper Cover. 2.

  • Page 536: Removing The Hopper Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-159 Removing the Hopper Unit CAUTION: 1) Open the Front Cover. When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN. 2) Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit). 5) Remove the Front Upper Cover.
  • Page 537 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-160 7) Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray. 8) Remove the Connecting Drive Unit. • 1 Screw • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion F-4-231 9) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. F-4-229 CAUTION: CAUTION:...
  • Page 538 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-161 10) Remove the Left Upper Cover 2. 13) Set the Lock Lever back. • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion F-4-235 14) Remove the Hopper Unit. • 4 Screws F-4-233 •...
  • Page 539 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit 4-162 16) Remove the Bottle Cam. CAUTION: • 1 E-ring When installing the Hopper Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to •...

  • Page 540: Removing The Buffer Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit 4-163 Removing the Buffer Unit 4) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter. <Preparation> 1. Open the Right Cover. 2. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-128) <Procedure>...
  • Page 541 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit 4-164 6) Release the Lock Lever to remove the Toner Bottle. NOTE: Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper. F-4-244 7) Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray. F-4-246 •...
  • Page 542 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit 4-165 9) Disconnect the connector of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. CAUTION:Points to Caution When Installing the Buffer Unit • Be sure to securely set the Buffer Unit on the Rail. •...

  • Page 543: Removing The Potential Control Pcb Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit 4-166 Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit <Procedure> 1) Remove the Right Door Link Unit from the pin. <Preparation> • 1 E-ring 1. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Unit. 2.
  • Page 544 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit 4-167 3) Remove the Potential Control Tray. 5) Remove the harness. • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • 2 Connectors • Edge Saddle • Wire Saddle •...

  • Page 545: Removing The Waste Toner Feed Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 4-168 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 2. Open the Controller Box. 2-1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). 1-1) Remove the Harness.
  • Page 546 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 4-169 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. <Procedure> 3-1) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow. 1) Open the Motor Driver Support Plate. •...
  • Page 547 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 4-170 3) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again 5) Remove the Duct. tighten the screw. •...

  • Page 548: Removing The Drum Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit 4-171 Removing the Drum Drive Unit 7) Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit. • 2 Connectors <Preparation> • 4 Screws 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly") 2.
  • Page 549 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit 4-172 2) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again 4) Remove the transformer. tighten the screw. •...

  • Page 550: Removing The Developing Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit 4-173 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 6) Remove the Duct Unit. • 3 Screws <Preparation> • 1 Connector 1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-128) •...
  • Page 551 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit 4-174 2) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again 4) Remove the transformer. tighten the screw. •...
  • Page 552 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit 4-175 6) Remove the Duct Unit. 8) Remove the Developing Drive Unit. • 3 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Connector • 1 Reuse Band • Harness •...

  • Page 553: Fixing

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly 4-176 Fixing 1-3) Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. Removing the Fixing Assembly <Preparation>...
  • Page 554 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly 4-177 <Procedure> CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation 1) Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit. • Be careful not to damage the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag. 2) Remove the Fixing Assembly.

  • Page 555: Cleaning The Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder 4-178 Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor 3) Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit. • 1 Connector Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder •...

  • Page 556: Cleaning The Inner Delivery Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller 4-179 Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller 4) Turn over the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, and insert lint-free paper into the clearance (front side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the <Preparation>...

  • Page 557: Cleaning The Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4-180 Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web Guide <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") <Preparation>...
  • Page 558 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4-181 4-2) Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. 2) Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web. • 1 Screw F-4-302 F-4-300 <Procedure> 1) Open the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover. • 2 Screws NOTE: Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover to remove the screws.

  • Page 559: Separating The Fixing Upper Unit From The Fixing Lower Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-182 Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower CAUIOTN: Points to Caution at Installation Unit • Be sure to install the Fixing Cleaning Web in the correct direction. <Preparation>...
  • Page 560 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-183 5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear. 5-2) Rotate the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear) with fingers. Then, align the cut-off of the Shutter Gear with the hole position, and secure with the Fixing Pin removed in step 5-1. 5-1) Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear).
  • Page 561 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-184 5-3) Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Front). 5-4) Align the cut-off of the Shutter Drive Gear (Front) with the hole position of the Plate, •...
  • Page 562 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 4-185 <Procedure> 3) Disconnect the 5 Connectors on the other side of the Fixing Assembly. • Wire Saddle 1) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 2. 4) Remove the Fixing Pin.

  • Page 563: Removing The Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush And Thrust Stopper

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper 4-186 Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation of the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Stopper • Be sure to fit the protrusion of the Fixing Shutter to the groove of the Fixing Shutter Drive Gear (Front) to install.
  • Page 564 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper 4-187 <Procedure> 3) Remove the Thrust Stopper from the Fixing Roller Unit to remove the Fixing Roller. Bearing 1) Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Roller Bearing Insulating Bush Retainer.

  • Page 565: Removing The Pressure Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller 4-188 Removing the Pressure Roller <Processing after replacing the parts> • Grease Application <Preparation> Apply approx. 20mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference and 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") outer circumference of the Bushing so that all circumferences are covered with white film;...

  • Page 566: Removing The Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit 4-189 Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit 2) Remove the Pressure Roller Unit. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") 2.

  • Page 567: Removing The Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 4-190 Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 2) Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") 2.
  • Page 568 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 4-191 2) Remove the Harness Guide and remove the Harness Band. 4) Remove the Thermistor Unit Support Plate to remove the Thermistor Reciprocating Shaft • 1 Screw from the Fixing Upper Unit.

  • Page 569: Removing The Sub Thermistor1

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor1 4-192 Removing the Sub Thermistor1 CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor 2 When the harness on the Thermistor side is short, the Sub Thermistor 2 may not <Preparation>...

  • Page 570: Removing The Upper Separation Claw

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Upper Separation Claw 4-193 Removing the Upper Separation Claw 3) Remove the Sub Thermistor Holder. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") <Procedure>...

  • Page 571: Cleaning The Upper Separation Claw

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw 4-194 Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw 3) Wipe toner off the 4 Inner Delivery Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") <Procedure>...

  • Page 572: Removing The Thermoswitch

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 4-195 Removing the Thermoswitch 2) Remove the Harness Guide. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly") 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176) 3.
  • Page 573 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch 4-196 4) Remove the Thermoswitch Unit. • 1 Screw F-4-341 5) Remove the Retainer Plate and Thermoswitch. Leaf Spring Thermoswitch F-4-342 4-196 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch...

  • Page 574: Pickup/Feed System

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller 4-197 Pickup/Feed System Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller <Preparation> Removing the Left Pickup Deck 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-197) 1) Open the Front Cover.

  • Page 575: Removing The Left Deck Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Pickup Deck 4-198 Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller Removing the Right Pickup Deck <Preparation> 1) Open the Front Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2) Pull out the Right Pickup Deck to remove. 2.

  • Page 576: Removing The Left Deck Separation Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller 4-199 Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller <Preparation> <Preparation> 1. Open the Front Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Right Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-198) 2.

  • Page 577: Removing The Right Deck Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller 4-200 Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller <Preparation> 1) Open the Right Upper Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2) Pull out the Right Pickup Deck. 2.

  • Page 578: Removing The Upper Cassette

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller 4-201 Removing the Upper Cassette Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller 1) Pull out the Upper Cassette to remove. <Preparation> • 4 Screws 1. Remove the Upper Cassette. (Refer to page 4-201) <Procedure>...

  • Page 579: Removing The Upper Cassette Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller 4-202 Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller <Preparation> 1) Open the Right Lower Cover. 1. Remove the Upper Cassette. (Refer to page 4-201) 2) Remove the Upper Cassette.

  • Page 580: Removing The Lower Cassette

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller 4-203 Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller Removing the Lower Cassette <Preparation> 1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-203) 1) Pull out the Lower Cassette to remove. •...

  • Page 581: Removing The Lower Cassette Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller 4-204 Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller <Preparation> 1) Open the Right Lower Cover. 1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-203) 2) Remove the Lower Cassette.

  • Page 582: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller 4-205 2) Remove the bushing. • 1 E-ring Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. 1-1) Open the Front Cover. 1-2) Open the Inner Cover. •...

  • Page 583: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 4-206 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller. • 1 E-ring <Preparation> 1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller") 2.

  • Page 584: Cleaning The Pickup And Fixing Feed Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-207 Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly CAUTION: Installation work gets difficult if the plate and the spring (as shown in the figure) are <Cleaning the Vertical Path Assembly>...
  • Page 585 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-208 5) Clean paper dust on the Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) and the Multi-purpose Tray Last 7) Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper Paper Sensor (PS28) with a blower.
  • Page 586 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-209 9) Open the Duplex Merging Guide and clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free <Cleaning the Fixing Feed Assembly> paper. 1) Open the Fixing Feed Unit fully. 2) Open the Registration Upper Guide, insert the paper lint cleaning tool into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [A].
  • Page 587 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-210 3) Insert lint-free paper into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the 5) Point the leading edge of Blower to the Static Eliminator and clean adhered soiling. Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [B] and the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.
  • Page 588 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-211 7) Hold the 2 handles to lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow. 9) I return an ETB unit to the original position. 10) Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide [A] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
  • Page 589 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-212 13) Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper 15) Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
  • Page 590 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-213 18) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] inside the equipment with lint-free paper. 19) Open the Duplex Path. 20) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Duplex Path (Upper/Lower) with lint-free paper.
  • Page 591 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4-214 22) Clean paper dust on the Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), and 24) Place a paper on the Duplex Path. Then, point the leading edge of Blower to the Roller Duplex Left Sensor (PS66) with a blower.

  • Page 592: Removing The Left Deck Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit 4-215 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit 3) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Right Deck. (Refer to page 4-198) 2. Remove the Left Deck. (Refer to page 4-197) <Procedure>...

  • Page 593: Removing The Right Deck Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit 4-216 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit 4) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Right Cover.(Refer to page 4-92) 2.

  • Page 594: Removing The Cassettes 3 And 4 Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit 4-217 Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit <Procedure> <Preparation> NOTE: This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit. 1. Remove the Right Lower Cover. Be sure to perform the same procedure when the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit is used.

  • Page 595: Removing The Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4-218 Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 3) Remove the Pickup Unit. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). 1-1) Remove the Harness.
  • Page 596 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4-219 2. Open the Controller Box. 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. 2-1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable. 3-1) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow. •...
  • Page 597 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4-220 2) Remove the Shield Plate. 4) Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit. • 1 Screw • 4 Screws • 2 Protrusions • 13 Connectors •...

  • Page 598: Removing The Registration Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit 4-221 Removing the Registration Unit CAUTION: When installing the handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten <Preparation> screws. 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. 1-1) Open the Front Cover.
  • Page 599 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit 4-222 1-3) Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull <Procedure> out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops. 1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover •...
  • Page 600 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit 4-223 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors. 5) Remove the Registration Unit. • 4 Screws F-4-429 4) Set the ETB Unit back. F-4-431 CAUTION: When installing, be sure to check that the 2 Positioning Pins are secured. F-4-430 F-4-432 4-223...

  • Page 601: Removing The Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit 4-224 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit NOTE: When installing the Registration Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure <Preparation>...

  • Page 602: Removing The Main Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-225 Removing the Main Drive Unit 2) Remove the Middle Vertical Path Guide. • 1 Screw <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit") 2.
  • Page 603 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-226 4) Remove the Shield Plate. NOTE: • 2 Screws When installing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be sure to follow the order as • 2 Protrusions shown in the figure to tighten screws.
  • Page 604 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-227 8) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again CAUTION: tighten the screw. When installing the Feed Driver PCB Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.
  • Page 605 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-228 10) Remove the transformer. 12) Remove the Duct Unit. • 2 Screws • 3 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Connector • Harness F-4-446 11) Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base. F-4-448 •...
  • Page 606 Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit 4-229 14) Remove the Right Rear Handle. 15) Remove the Main Drive Unit. • 4 Screws • 6 Screws • 1 Connector F-4-450 F-4-452 CAUTION: When installing the Right Rear Handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.

  • Page 607: External Auxiliary System

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Ozone Filter 4-230 External Auxiliary System Removing the Ozone Filter 1) Remove the Filter Cover. Removing the Filter (for primary charging) • 1 Screw 1) Open the Front Cover. 2) Remove the Filter (for primary charging).

  • Page 608: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB 4-231 Removing the DC Controller PCB 2. Open the Controller Box. 2-1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). 1-1) Remove the Harness. •...
  • Page 609 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB 4-232 <Procedure> 3) Remove the DC Controller PCB in the direction of the arrow. 1) Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover. • 8 Screws • 4 Screws (TP) F-4-462 F-4-460 CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation...
  • Page 610 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB 4-233 <Processing after replacing the parts> • Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back of the Front Cover. F-4-464 4-233 Parts Replacement and Clearning >...

  • Page 611: Removing The Power Supply Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply Assembly 4-234 Removing the Power Supply Assembly 2) Disconnect the 23 Connectors and free the Harness to the top of the Power Supply Assembly. <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB") 2.

  • Page 612: Removing The Fixing Power Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Power Unit 4-235 Removing the Fixing Power Unit 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover. • 3 Screws CAUTION:Points to Caution before Operation When executing this procedure, be sure to turn OFF the breaker beforehand. F-4-471 Leakage Breaker 3) Remove the Left Upper Frame.

  • Page 613: Removing The Feed Driver Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Feed Driver PCB 4-236 Removing the Feed Driver PCB 4) Free the harness and remove the Fixing Power Unit. • 4 Connectors <Preparation> • 2 Screws 1. Remove the Waste Toner Container. (Refer to page 4-145) 2.

  • Page 614: Removing The Upper High Voltage Unit

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit 4-237 2) Remove the Feed Driver PCB. • 6 Screws Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit • 15 Connectors <Preparation> 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB") 2.

  • Page 615: Removing The Flat Control Panel

    Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-238 Removing the Flat Control Panel 2) Disconnect the connector and Grounding Wire. • 1 Screw NOTE: The same procedure is applied to both copier model and printer model. 1) Open the Toner Replacement Cover.
  • Page 616 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-239 4) Close the Right Cover. 7) Open the Upper Right Cover. 5) Remove the Right Rear Cover 2. (The removed cover and screws are no longer used.) 8) Remove the Upper Right Cover.
  • Page 617 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-240 Remove the 4 screws which secure the Flat Control Panel. Move the Flat Control Panel to the front and disconnect the Control Panel Cable and (The removed screws will be used when installing the Front Upper Cover (Middle).) Power Supply Cable.
  • Page 618 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-241 Lift up the Flat Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and pull out the Control Disconnect the Control Panel Cable. Panel Cable. • 6 Wire Saddles Disconnect the Control Panel Connector and Power Supply Connector, and then •...
  • Page 619 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-242 4-242 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel...
  • Page 620 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel 4-243 4-243 Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel...

  • Page 621: Adjustment

    Adjustment ■ Overview ■ When replacing parts Adjustment...

  • Page 622: Controller System

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD Overview When replacing parts In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are Controller System mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 4 blocks based on their related technology as shown below.
  • Page 623 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD 2. After Replacing When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager 1) HDD format Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement.

  • Page 624: Main Controller Pcb 1

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1 ■ Main Controller PCB 1 NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-80. <Procedure of adjustment>...
  • Page 625 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2 ■ Main Controller PCB 2 1. Before Replacing Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. <Procedure of parts replacement> 1) Backup of the set/registered data see "Removing Main Controller PCB 2,"...
  • Page 626 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2 2. When Replacing 3. After Replacing 1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. •...

  • Page 627: Primary Charging Assembly

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly Image Formation System ■ TPM PCB <Procedure of parts replacement> ■ Primary Charging Wire see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-80. <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of adjustment>...
  • Page 628 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the When the rear side test print image is dark replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output NOTE: a test print and check the image.

  • Page 629: Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Pre-transfer Charging Wire ■ Pre-transfer Charging Assembly CAUTION: <Procedure of parts replacement> Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment see "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly," on p. 4-107. screws with the same amount.

  • Page 630: Photosensitive Drum

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Photosensitive Drum 5-10 ■ Photosensitive Drum 4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover. <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-122. <Procedure of adjustment>...

  • Page 631: Drum Side Seals (Front And Rear)

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Waste Toner Container 5-11 ■ Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) ■ ETB Unit / ETB <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Side Seal," on p. 4-127. •...

  • Page 632: Fixing System

    Adjustment > When replacing parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB 5-12 Fixing System External Auxiliary System ■ Fixing Roller ■ DC Controller PCB <Procedure of parts replacement> <Procedure of parts replacement> see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-186. see "Removing the DC Controller PCB,"...

  • Page 633: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting ■ Test Print ■ Image Faults ■ Feed Faults ■ Other ■ Version upgrade ■ Making Initial Checks ■ Error Messages ■ Error Codes Troubleshooting...

  • Page 634: Overview

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview Test Print Overview Image check item Uneven Right angle Pattern Transfer Black White Uneven density accuracy Side Magnification PCB to generate PG TYPE Gradation Fogging Shock failure line line pitch (rear/ Straight line registration ratio front) accuracy...

  • Page 635: How To View The Test Print

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3) How to View the Test Print ■ 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3) ■ Grid (TYPE=1) F-6-2 Check item Check method Assumed cause F-6-1 Check whether gradation in density is Drum failure, laser exposure system failure Gradation made appropriately.

  • Page 636: Solid White (Type=4)

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14) ■ Solid white (TYPE=4) NOTE: • When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases. 1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11. 2.

  • Page 637: Solid Black (Type=7)

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10) ■ Solid black (TYPE=7) ■ Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10) F-6-5 F-6-6 Check item Check method Assumed cause Check item Check method Assumed cause Check the evenness of halftone Laser light path failure, grid failure, Transfer system failure or Pre-transfer Transfer failure...

  • Page 638: Image Faults

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Trailing Edge Shock Imaget Image Faults [Image Sample] Feed direction Trailing Edge Shock Imaget <Shock image located approx. 63mm 55mm from the trailing edge> [Location] .ETB [Cause] Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation speed between the ETB and drum differs [Condition] When replacing the ETB...

  • Page 639: Uneven Density Correction By 2D Shading

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading Uneven density correction by 2D shading 4) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6 To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum. Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3 (LDR) or larger.
  • Page 640 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading 5-2) Output 3 sheets of the test pattern. <Test pattern> F-6-9 CAUTION: It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes uneven density of the output image, so output 3 sheets of the test print and adjust the area where all.
  • Page 641 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading 6) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of uneven density. 6-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode. When the adjustment cannot be performed appropriately, these values are required to return to the initial values.
  • Page 642 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading 6-10 6-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image. When uneven density is seen: Go to 6-4). When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended. 6-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen.

  • Page 643: Adf Black Line

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > ADF black line 6-11 ADF black line [Remedy] Changing the setting value in the following service mode improves the problem of a black Image processing has been improved with this equipment, which applies optimal image line.

  • Page 644: Separation Failure Jam Due To Deformation Of Separation Claw

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-12 Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller Separation Claw...
  • Page 645 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-13 [Image Sample] <Procedure> 1) Open the Duplex Path. Feed Direction 2) Remove the Fixed Feed Cover 1. •...
  • Page 646 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-14 4) Remove the left side Duct. 5) Remove the Duplex Driver PCB and the Mounting Base. •...
  • Page 647 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-15 6) Remove the following parts. 9) Remove the following parts. • 2 E-rings • 3 Connectors •...

  • Page 648: Right Roller And The Duplex Outlet Roller

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-16 11) Place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path, and remove a N-ring each from the Duplex 13) Pull out the Duplex Right Roller and remove the shaft at the rear.
  • Page 649 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-17 14) Move the Duplex Right Roller toward the rear and remove the shaft from the Fixing Feed Unit Side Plate.
  • Page 650 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 6-18 16) Remove the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet 18) Remove the paper on the Duplex Path, and clean the entire perimeter of each of the 4 Roller.

  • Page 651: Uneven Density

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density 6-19 Uneven density 20) Clean the four areas on the removed Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. [Cause] Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change in drum characteristics due to wear.

  • Page 652: Smeared Image

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Smeared image 6-20 Smeared image [Cause] Feed Direction Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared F-6-37 image: In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal...
  • Page 653 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Smeared image 6-21 [Field Remedy] Select the following: “Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance > Adjust Image > Auto Adjust Gradation; and check the output result. Start the field remedy 1) In COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1, set the values to "4", "7", and "-10" in that order from the left, and check the output result.

  • Page 654: Adjusting The Edge Emphasis Level

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level 6-22 Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level Example: In the case of the environment where the relative value "135" is suitable as the default value. 1) Set "SHARP" to "4". The edge emphasis level of image can be adjusted in both user mode and service mode, but 2) Set "Sharpness", which is set to "+1"...

  • Page 655: Soiling At An Interval Equal To The Circumference Of The Developing Sleeve

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing Sleeve 6-23 Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the 3) Wipe the surface of the sleeve with dry lint-free paper. Developing Sleeve CAUTION: Do not use water or alcohol.

  • Page 656: Mtf Adjustment

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure 6-24 MTF Adjustment ■ Adjustment Procedure 1) Obtain the MTF adjustment chart. The MTF value of the Reader Unit may differ from the factory setting value depending on the condition of transportation/storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it may cause an image failure such as moire.

  • Page 657: When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling The Mtf Value

    Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > When Disabling the MTF Adjustment 6-25 3) Execute sampling of the MTF value. ■ When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling the MTF Value Description of adjustment Color/B&W (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > 1) Set the MTF value for fine adjustment to “1”.

  • Page 658: Feed Faults

    Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm 6-26 Feed Faults Other Paper wrinkle Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm <Location> If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.
  • Page 659 Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm 6-27 1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment 3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation Ring.

  • Page 660: Remedy To Be Implemented When The Etb Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) Is Left Unremoved

    Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved 6-28 Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage 3) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover. • 2 Screws Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved When the power is turned ON after installation, E017-0003 may occur due to the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) left unremoved.
  • Page 661 Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved 6-29 5) Remove the Fan Duct. 7) Remove the Transfer Frame Stopper. • 2 Screws Duct Transfer Frame Stopper F-6-52 F-6-50 6) Rotate the Disengage Gear about 90 degrees counterclockwise by hand and lower the ITB Unit.

  • Page 662: Checking Nip Width

    Troubleshooting > Other > Checking nip width 6-30 Checking nip width In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the field.

  • Page 663: Controller Self Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool 6-31 Controller Self Diagnosis Overview Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations Introduction shown below. Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for DC Controler PCB errors are described.

  • Page 664: Layout Drawing

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing 6-32 ■ Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB 1 This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel. This tool is installed in HDD.

  • Page 665: Basic Flowchart

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart 6-33 Basic Flowchart Main Controller PCB 2 Basic Check Items Check all of the items shown below. Turn O N the m ain pow er s witc h. BAT1 DDR2-SDRAM DDR2-SDRAM 512MB Standard 512MB Option Does the Pow er Supply LED Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.

  • Page 666: Basic Check Items

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation 6-34 ■ Basic Check Items Control Panel(Flat) 1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF. 2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected. 3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is disconnected.

  • Page 667: Diagnosis Time

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Diagnosis Time 6-35 2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis <When an error is detected by diagnosis> starts. The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in (When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the which an error is detected.

  • Page 668: Error Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Boot Method 6-36 Controller System Error Diagnosis ■ Error Diagnosis <Boot System Error Diagnosis Table> ■ Boot Method The error locations are identified according to the following table. 1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.

  • Page 669: Diagnosis Time

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time 6-37 2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears ■ Diagnosis Time on the Control Panel. Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes. The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
  • Page 670 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time 6-38 [no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. Assumed Error Error Test Name Description Remedy When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been Location Code SN-6 PCI...

  • Page 671: Restrictions

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Restrictions 6-39 Assumed Error Error Test Name Description Remedy Location Code SN-16 SRAM Check failure of Main Controller Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. E246 SRAM on the Main PCB 2 E350 Controller PCB 2.

  • Page 672: Version Upgrade

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade 6-40 Version upgrade Overview ■ Overview of Version Upgrade The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software. ● Downloading System Software This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.

  • Page 673: Writing System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode 6-41 ■ Writing System Software ■ Download Mode The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage temporary memory space.

  • Page 674: System Software Components

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components 6-42 ■ System Software Components The table below shows the system software components for this machine. Display on SST How to upgrade versions Registered Name of Software to be upgraded Remarks name of system...

  • Page 675: Note On Download Process

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process 6-43 The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double ■ Note on Download Process Pass, requiring specific system software for each. • The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color Warning: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.

  • Page 676: Version Upgrade Via Sst

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview 6-44 Version Upgrade via SST ● Downloading the System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST. ■ Overview Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash ROM.

  • Page 677: Copying System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software 6-45 ■ Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button. ● System CD -> SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST. NOTE: The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.

  • Page 678: Connection

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-46 7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click “OK” button. ■ Connection The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode. •...
  • Page 679 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-47 4) Check the IP address of the PC. Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt. Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC. If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network settings of the PC.

  • Page 680: Downloading System Software (Assist Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 6-48 ■ Downloading System Software (Assist mode) NOTE: When You was connected to the main body of Safe mode in Assist mode: 1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > A system software of LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT, SDICT can acquire version DOWNLOAD).

  • Page 681: Downloading System Software (Single Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-49 displayed. ■ Downloading System Software (Single mode) The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system software can be downloaded similarly). NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes 1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
  • Page 682 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-50 NOTE: NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen. Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes. •...
  • Page 683 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-51 6) Click “Shutdown / Restart” button. NOTE: If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM. 1) Click “Clear”...

  • Page 684: Formatting Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-52 ■ Formatting HDD When executing format ALL When executing format BOOTDEV startup in normal mode ● Overview Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting. •...
  • Page 685 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-53 When executing format ALL startup in normal mode NOTE: When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL With SSTv4.41, due to sharing the simple mode processing with the existing models, the following screen is displayed.
  • Page 686 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-54 ● Steps of Formatting 5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start". 1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.) 2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
  • Page 687 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-55 7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See ● Mounting New HDD the steps to download the system software for details. After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.

  • Page 688: Backup

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-56 When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure. ■ Backup Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the ●...
  • Page 689 The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader • When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of Controller PCB.
  • Page 690 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-58 3) Select the model to be connected and the information file for individual download (“Single”). 5) Select “MeapBack.bin” to click “Start” button. Check the network settings and click “Start”. F-6-109 6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary.
  • Page 691 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-59 ● Steps to Download Data 4) Click “Download Data” button. CAUTION: The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All Data/Setings";...

  • Page 692: Version Upgrade Using Usb Memory Storage Device

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device 6-60 Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device ● Downloading System Software Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. ■...

  • Page 693: Copying System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-61 ■ Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button. ● System CD to SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
  • Page 694 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-62 7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click “OK” button. ● SST to USB memory Storage Device Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. Preparation Requirements: •...
  • Page 695 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-63 4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen. 6) Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version). F-6-120 F-6-122 5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is NOTE: inserted.

  • Page 696: Connection

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection 6-64 ■ Connection NOTE: When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is CAUTION: triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded.

  • Page 697: Upgrading System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-65 3) Switch to the download mode to use. ■ Upgrading System Software • In the case of normal mode (Recommended) ● Menu/Function Overview Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >...
  • Page 698 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-66 ● Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software CAUTION:Caution when the power is turned OFF Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode. NOTE: The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the...

  • Page 699: Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) 6-67 ■ Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen. ●...

  • Page 700: Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation) 6-68 Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the ■ Downloading System Software (Confirmation) HDD system area/flash ROM. ●...
  • Page 701 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation) 6-69 Operation procedure Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset” 1) Enter download mode. key. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel.

  • Page 702: Downloading System Software (Overwriting)

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting) 6-70 ■ Downloading System Software (Overwriting) CAUTION: ● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well.

  • Page 703: Formatting Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD 6-71 ■ Formatting HDD When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL ● HDD Format Overview Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine: •...

  • Page 704: Format Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD 6-72 ● [4]: Format HDD 4) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.

  • Page 705: Clearing Download File

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Other Menu 6-73 ■ Backup This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the system software in menu [2] or [3]. ●...

  • Page 706: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001 6-74 Troubleshooting ● [1]: Version Information ■ Error Code: E753-0001 This mode displays the version of download mode. ● Cause In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753- 0001.

  • Page 707: Making Initial Checks

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items 6-75 Making Initial Checks List of Initial Check Items Item Detail Check Site Environment The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place.

  • Page 708: Version Upgrade Via Cds

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Overview of Preparation 6-76 Version Upgrade via CDS Preparation ■ Overview ■ Overview of Preparation Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the The following should be prepared before using Updater. following 3 methods are available using Updater functions.

  • Page 709: Network Settings

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings 6-77 ■ Setting Sales Company’s HQ ■ Network Settings When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s 1. Connecting to External Network HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
  • Page 710 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings 6-78 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.
  • Page 711 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings 6-79 3. Communication Test 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1.

  • Page 712: Enabling Ugw Link

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link 6-80 5. Press [Yes] button. ■ Enabling UGW Link When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...

  • Page 713: Ugw-Linked Download And Update (Full-Remote Update)

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-81 a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) Update) See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”. See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1...
  • Page 714 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-82 2. Press [Updater] button. 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. F-6-155 F-6-157 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. F-6-158 F-6-156 6-82 Troubleshooting >...

  • Page 715: Manual Download And Update (On-Site Update From Service Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-83 c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from 6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied.
  • Page 716 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-84 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. F-6-163 • [Retrieval ID]: F-6-161 Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
  • Page 717 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-85 6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button. 7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. F-6-164 F-6-165 •...
  • Page 718 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-86 • [E-mail]: 8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here. button.
  • Page 719 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-87 • When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and STEP 2: Update using Updater [Manual], respectively: The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
  • Page 720 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-88 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. F-6-173 6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the F-6-171 firmware is successfully applied.

  • Page 721: Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 6-89 Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button. This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1).

  • Page 722: Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 6-90 Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel. 2).

  • Page 723: Deleting Downloaded Firmware

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Downloaded Firmware 6-91 Deleting Downloaded Firmware 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. 1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel. This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater. 2).

  • Page 724: Troubleshooting On Firmware Installation

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 6-92 Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 4. Press [Delete Firmware] button. No.1 Symptom: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater. Cause: Preparation has not been properly done. Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Company’s HQ bellow. Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1) COPIER >...
  • Page 725 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 6-93 No.2 No.5 Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions. Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found. Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like. Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded Action: Retry download.

  • Page 726: Information Required For Reports

    Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files 6-94 Information required for Reports Debug Logs ■ Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site ■ Obtaining Log Files • Update Logs Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI. •...
  • Page 727 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files 6-95 3. From “Display Logs/Communication Test” screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and Update Logs by copy & paste. Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/ Others] >...

  • Page 728: Error Messages

    Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-96 Error Messages Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred with the delivery In communicating with the System error occurred in server.
  • Page 729 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-97 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Server : Connect Failed Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect to the Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job. File Server : Retrieve Failed (communication test result delivery server.
  • Page 730 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-98 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new Check if the log file exceeded the max value. Error Code: [xxx] (main screen) log was not accepted. <Update log>...
  • Page 731 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-99 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. UGW linkage (main UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the Error Code: [xxx] screen) UGW linkage.
  • Page 732 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-100 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. Check the Update UGW linkage (main eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, Firmware screen.
  • Page 733 Troubleshooting > Error Messages 6-101 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, Error Code: [xxx] Firmware screen) to the server.

  • Page 734: Error Codes

    Troubleshooting > Error Codes > How to read an error code 6-102 Error Codes Error Codes displayed on LUI in a device and how to read them. How to read an error code 8401 4206 Code Value Contents The first digit Error Error field The second digit...

  • Page 735: Error Code

    Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-103 Error Code The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Suppot Group in the sales company. Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy...
  • Page 736 Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-104 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS file Network digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery...
  • Page 737 Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-105 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS file Network digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery...
  • Page 738 Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code 6-106 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS file Network digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery...

  • Page 739: Debug Log

    * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and collection Continuous Event log Manual log the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up. When an event When has occurred...

  • Page 740: Collecting System Information

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) 6-108 ● Collection of Logs ■ Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) Connect SST or a USB memory device, and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs. NOTE: When the data is sent to the USB memory device: USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using...

  • Page 741: Uploading Data By Sst

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions: 6-109 ● When the data is sent to the USB memory device ■ Uploading Data by SST A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver.
  • Page 742 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions: 6-110 2. Press the Upload Data button. 4. Press the "Save" button. F-6-194 F-6-196 3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button. 5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button. When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
  • Page 743 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions: 6-111 6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC. In the initial setting: Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) > 20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm) F-6-198 6-111 Troubleshooting >...

  • Page 744: Operation Check Of The Main Controller Leds

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4, LED5 on the Main Controller 2 6-112 Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs ■ Checking■the■lighting■of■the■LED4,■LED5■on■the■Main■Controller■2■ ■ You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.

  • Page 745: Check The Lighting Of The Ldes On The Main Controller Pcb

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 6-113 ■ Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 • Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16 •...

  • Page 746: Error Code Overview

    Error Code ■ Overview ■ Error Code ■ Jam Code ■ Alarm Code Error Code...

  • Page 747: Outline

    Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD Overview ■ Pickup position code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. Outline In the jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code. This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the Pickup position Pickup position code...

  • Page 748: Error Code

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Error Code Detail Location Item Description Code Code E001 -0002 -05 Title Fixing Assembly high temperature error (software detection) Error Code Details Detection • The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detects 230 degC or description higher.
  • Page 749 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E002 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Assembly temperature rise error E004 -0205 -05 Title Fixing Power Supply error Detection •...
  • Page 750 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E012 -0001 -05 Title Drum Motor (M1) error E014 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Motor error Detection Lock error of the Drum Motor (M1).
  • Page 751 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E017 -0002 -05 Title ETB engagement error E017 -0003 -05 Title ETB HP error Detection Engagement of the ETB is not completed within the specified Detection Engagement of the ETB was not completed at initialization.
  • Page 752 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E020 -0000 -05 Title Developing Assembly toner absent error E020 -0003 -05 Title Error in the Toner Excess Supply Sensor connection detection Detection Toner in the Developing Assembly was empty for 2 minutes.
  • Page 753 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E023 -0001 -05 Title Developing Motor error E027 -0001 -05 Title Toner Supply Motor error Detection Lock error of the Developing Motor (M2).
  • Page 754 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E053 -0001 -05 Title Error in Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid connection detection E060 -0001 -05 Title Primary Charging Shutter HP open error Detection...
  • Page 755 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-10 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E060 -0002 -05 Title Primary Charging Shutter HP close error E061 -0001 -05 Title Potential control error (VL) Detection The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94) detects that the...
  • Page 756 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-11 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E061 -0101 -05 Title Potential control error (VD) E065 -0001 -05 Title Primary charging/grid high voltage output leak error Detection Potential in the dark area did not fall within the range (target Detection...
  • Page 757 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-12 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E066 -0001 -05 Title Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP open error E066 -0002 -05 Title Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP close error Detection The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95) detects...
  • Page 758 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069 7-13 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E067 -0001 -05 Title Developing high voltage output leak error E069 -0001 -05 Title Transfer high voltage output leak error Detection The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for...

  • Page 759: E100 To E199

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E199 7-14 ■ E100 to E199 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E100 -13xx Title Polygon Motor BD unlock error (Laser diode is not lit up/failure Code Code of the BD PCB/power supply error, or condensation)
  • Page 760 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E199 7-15 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E103 -0001 -05 Title Different Laser Scanner Unit model error E110 -13xx Title Polygon Motor FG unlock error Detection The scanner for 6275/6265/6255 models was installed to the Detection...
  • Page 761 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E199 7-16 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E197 -0002 -05 Title Error in Feed Driver PCB connection detection E197 -0005 -05 Title Error in Main Driver PCB Analog Connector connection detection...

  • Page 762: E202 To E280

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280 7-17 ■ E202 to E280 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E197 -0010 -05 Title Error in Primary Charging High Voltage PCB connection Code Code detection...
  • Page 763 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280 7-18 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E227 -0003 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error E240 -0001 -05 Title 3 minutes passed with pickup request waiting status Detection 24 V port is OFF when a job is ended.
  • Page 764 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280 7-19 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E247 -0002 -00 Title System error E263 -0001 -05 Title Current Sensor error Detection Detection An error is detected in the value of the Current Sensor (SE601) description...

  • Page 765: E301 To E355

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355 7-20 ■ E301 to E355 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E270 -0101 -04 Title Error in paper back vertical scanning synchronous signal Code Code Detection...
  • Page 766 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E355 7-21 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E315 0025 Title Codec error E315 0530 Title Codec error Detection ROTU hardware error. Detection Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed description...

  • Page 767: E400 To E490

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490 7-22 ■ E400 to E490 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E350 0001 Title System error Code Code Detection E400 -0001 -04 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) description and DADF...
  • Page 768 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490 7-23 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E407 -0001 -04 Title Tray Lifter Motor (M8) error E413 -0011 Title DADF Disengagement Motor 2 (M7) error Detection The Tray HP Sensor (SR13) is not turned ON or OFF within Detection...
  • Page 769 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490 7-24 7-24 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E400 to E490...
  • Page 770 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-25 ■ E500 to E5F6 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E505 -0002 -05 Title EEPROM error (External 2 Hole Puncher) Code Code Detection The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
  • Page 771 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-26 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E519 -0002 -05 Title Gear change home position error (Finisher-P1) E531 -8001 -05 Title Staple home position error (Finisher-P1) Detection The Gear Change Hhome Position Sensor does not turn ON...
  • Page 772 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-27 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E535 -8002 -05 Title Swing home position error (Finisher-P1) E540 -8002 -05 Title Tray 1 shift area error (Finisher-P1) Detection The Stapler does not return to the swing home position when Detection...
  • Page 773 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-28 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E540 -8006 -05 Title The Tray 1 Shift Motor acceleration error (Finisher-P1) E542 -8004 -05 Title The Tray 2 Shift Motor clock error (Finisher-P1) Detection...
  • Page 774 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-29 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E551 -0021 -05 Title Error in the Power Supply Fan of the Paper Folding Unit E569 -8001 -05 Title Upper Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go...
  • Page 775 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-30 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E56B -8001 -05 Title C-fold Tray Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go through E590 -8001 -05 Title Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
  • Page 776 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-31 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E592 -8001 -05 Title Trailing Edge Sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher) E592 -8006 -05 Title Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
  • Page 777 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-32 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E593 -8001 -05 Title Horizontal registration home position error (External 2 Hole E5E1 -8001 -05 Title Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go through HP Puncher)
  • Page 778 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-33 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E5F1 -8001 -05 Title Paper Ffolding Motor lock error (Finisher-P1) E5F4 -8001 -05 Title Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-P1) Detection The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/sec or...
  • Page 779 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6 7-34 Detail Location Item Description Code Code E5F6 -8003 -05 Title Paper Pushing Plate Motor clock error (Finisher-P1) Detection The number of pulses detected by the Paper Pushing Plate description Motor Clock Sensor is 6 pulses or less.

  • Page 780: E602

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-35 ■ E602 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E602 0003 Title Error in HDD Code Code Detection WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice E602 0001 Title Error in HDD description...
  • Page 781 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-36 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0006 Title Error in HDD E602 0010 Error in HDD Detection There is no system for the sub CPU There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files description 1.
  • Page 782 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-37 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0101 Title Error in HDD E602 0111 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at startup) Detection Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after startup) description...
  • Page 783 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-38 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0201 Title Error in HDD E602 0211 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in management data area of image (at startup) Detection Error in management data area of image (after startup) description...
  • Page 784 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-39 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0301 Title Error in HDD E602 0311 Title Error in HDD Detection Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup) Detection Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after startup) description...
  • Page 785 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-40 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0401 Title Error in HDD E602 0411 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in thumbnail area (at startup) Detection Error in thumbnail area (after startup) description...
  • Page 786 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-41 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0501 Title Error in HDD E602 0511 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of universal data (at startup) Detection Error in storage area of universal data (after startup) description...
  • Page 787 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-42 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0601 Title Error in HDD E602 0611 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at Detection Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (after description...
  • Page 788 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-43 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0701 Title Error in HDD E602 0711 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup) Detection Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after startup) description...
  • Page 789 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-44 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0801 Title Error in HDD E602 0811 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup) Detection Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after startup) description...
  • Page 790 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-45 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 0901 Title Error in HDD E602 0911 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup) Detection Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup) description...
  • Page 791 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-46 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 1011 Title Error in HDD E602 1111 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after startup) Detection Error in MEAP area (after startup) description...
  • Page 792 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-47 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 1201 Title Error in HDD E602 1311 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in Send area (at startup) Detection Error in MEAP area (after startup) description...
  • Page 793 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-48 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 1401 Title Error in HDD E602 1411 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in storage area of system log (at startup) Detection Error in storage area of system log (after startup) description...
  • Page 794 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-49 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 1501 Title Error in HDD E602 1511 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in Advanced Box area (at startup) Detection Error in Advanced Box area (after startup) description...
  • Page 795 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-50 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 1601 Title Error in HDD E602 1611 Title Error in HDD Detection Error in CDS area (at startup) Detection Error in CDS area (after startup) description...
  • Page 796 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-51 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E602 2000 Title Error in HDD Encryption Board E602 FF11 Title Error in HDD Detection Authentication error between the host machine and the Detection HDD error (unidentified) (after startup) description...
  • Page 797 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-52 7-52 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 798 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-53 7-53 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 799 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-54 7-54 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 800 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-55 7-55 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 801 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-56 7-56 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 802 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-57 7-57 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 803 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-58 7-58 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 804 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-59 7-59 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 805 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-60 7-60 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 806 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-61 7-61 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 807 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-62 7-62 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 808 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-63 7-63 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 809 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-64 7-64 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 810 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-65 7-65 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 811 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-66 7-66 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 812 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-67 7-67 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 813 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-68 7-68 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 814 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-69 7-69 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...
  • Page 815 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 7-70 7-70 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602...

  • Page 816: E604 To E677

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677 7-71 ■ E604 to E677 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E610 -0202 -00 Title Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration Code Code error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption...
  • Page 817 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E677 7-72 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E611 -0000 -00 Title Rebooting due to SRAM corruption when executing a E674 -0100 -00 Title FAX error transmission job that secures disconnection of the power...

  • Page 818: E710 To E760

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-73 ■ E710 to E760 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E711 -0040 -05 Title IPC communication error (serial error) Code Code Detection Communication between the host machine and the Finisher E710 -0001 -00 Title...
  • Page 819 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-74 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E717 -0002 -00 Title Communication error with the NE Controller E719 -0032 -00 Title Communication error after the Card Reader (serial) is started Detection IPC error at NE Controller operation.
  • Page 820 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-75 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E730 -A006 -00 Title PDL communication error E732 -0023 -00 Title Scanner communication error Detection No reply from PDL.
  • Page 821 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-76 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E733 -0002 -00 Title Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and E743 -0003 -04 Title DDI communication error the DC Controller PCB...
  • Page 822 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-77 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E744 -4000 -05 Title Engine ID error E746 -0032 -00 Title Error in engine ID of SoftID Detection The Main Controller PCB model and the DC Controller PCB Detection...
  • Page 823 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E710 to E760 7-78 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E746 -0034 -00 Title Error occurs, but auto recovery of system is possible (TPM) E748 -2023 -00 Title Main controller board 2 access errors...

  • Page 824: E804 To E996

    Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-79 ■ E804 to E996 Detail Location Item Description Code Code Detail Location Item Description E753 -0001 -05 Title Download Error Code Code Detection System Software Update Error E804 -0000 -05 Title Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 error...
  • Page 825 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-80 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E808 -0003 -05 Title Fixing Power Supply error E808 -0008 -05 Title Fixing Power Supply error Detection Inlet current is 1 A or lower for 1 second or longer although the Detection...
  • Page 826 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-81 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E840 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Shutter Motor error E905 -0003 -05 Title POD Deck Air Assist Fan error Detection The Fixing Shutter HP Sensor (PS53) failed the detection at Detection...
  • Page 827 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E996 7-82 Detail Location Item Description Detail Location Item Description Code Code Code Code E996 -0CA1 -05 Title Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER) E996 -0CAF -05 Title Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Detection Error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Detection...

  • Page 828: Jam Code

    Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-83 Jam Code Jam Type Jam types are shown below. Type Meaning DELAY Delay jam STNRY Stationary jam OVERLAP Double feed detection TIMING NG Timing error OHP NG Incorrect paper ADF OP ADF open COVER OP Cover open...

  • Page 829: Main Unit

    Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit 7-84 Main Unit Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 0101 DELAY Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1 PS19 PS52 PS20 PS67 PS29 PS28 PS64 0102 DELAY Right Deck Pull Out Sensor PS32 0103 DELAY Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS24...
  • Page 830 Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit 7-85 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 0A0F POWER ON Fixing Inlet Sensor Power ON jam PS51 0A10 POWER ON Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor 0A11 POWER ON Fixing Outlet Sensor PS52 0A12 POWER ON Inner Delivery Sensor PS35...

  • Page 831: Duplex Color Image Reader-G1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-G1 7-86 Duplex Color Image Reader-G1 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 0051 DELAY Delivery sensor PCB5 SR20 SR22 SR17 PCB2 SR12 0052 STNRY Delivery sensor PCB5 PCB3 SR18 SR19 SR10 0071 TIMING NG TIMING NG...

  • Page 832: Paper Deck Unit-D1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Deck Unit-A1 7-87 Paper Deck Unit-A1 Paper Deck Unit-D1 F-7-4 Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID Code 0117 DELAY Deck feed sensor F-7-3 0118 DELAY Deck pickup sensor Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID 0218 STNRY...
  • Page 833 Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-L1 7-88 Inserter-L1 ACC ID Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 10B1 DELAY Paper Registration Sensor Delay jam 10B2 DELAY Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam 10B3 DELAY Reverse Sensor Delay jam 10B4 DELAY Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam 11C1 STNRY Paper Registration Sensor Stationary jam...

  • Page 834: Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1 7-89 Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 10B1 DELAY Paper Registration Sensor Delay jam 10B2 DELAY Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam 10B3 DELAY Reverse Sensor Delay jam 10B4 DELAY Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam...

  • Page 835: External 2-Hole Puncher-A1

    Error Code > Jam Code > External 2-hole Puncher-A1 7-90 External 2-hole Puncher-A1 Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 1F44 PUNCH Punch home jam PI63 PI63 1F45 POWER ON Punch Residual jam LED5,PTR5 LED5/ 1012 DELAY Punch Path Sensor Feed Delay jam LED5, PTR5 PTR5 1122...

  • Page 836: Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1

    Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1 7-91 Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1 ACC ID Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID Code 1011 DELAY Inlet Path Sensor Feed Delay jam PI103 1013 DELAY Escape Path Sensor Feed Delay jam PI118 1014 DELAY Delivery Path Sensor Feed Delay jam PI104 1091...

  • Page 837: Alarm Code

    Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-92 Alarm Code Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code 04-0001 Right Deck Lifter error Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not List of Alarm Code using the Right Deck.
  • Page 838 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-93 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 04-0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not 04-0008 Option Deck Lifter Movement: The Option Deck Pickup Motor (M) is stopped.
  • Page 839 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-94 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 04-0033 Cassette 3 Lifter Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not 04-0071 Error in Cassette Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Cassette 3.
  • Page 840 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-95 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 04-0075 Error in Reverse Movement: Jam occurred at the time of large size paper 09-0009 Drum HP signal Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of...
  • Page 841 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-96 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 31-0008 HDD failure prediction Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due 33-0001 Delivery Assembly Movement: No change.
  • Page 842 Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code 7-97 Alarm Alarm Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Code Code 33-0026 Charging Assembly Movement: No change. 50-0008 Insufficient light Movement: Nothing in particular. Fan 1 alarm Cause: Connector disconnection of the Pre-transfer Charging intensity in Lead...
  • Page 843 XPS document data 78-0003 Invalid GL entry error 78-0005 System memory full 84-0005 XPS page data error 79-0001 Canon-made PCL PCL initialization error 84-0006 XPS image data error - 79-0002 Canon-made PCL PCL processing error 84-0007 XPS font data error...

  • Page 844: Service Mode

    Service Mode ■ Overview ■ COPIER ■ FEEDER ■ SORTER ■ BOARD Service Mode...

  • Page 845: Entering Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations Overview Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself. displayed.

  • Page 846: I/O Information Enhancement

    Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description I/O information enhancement Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor, The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.

  • Page 847: Copier > Option > Body, Item Segmentation

    Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.

  • Page 848: Security Features

    Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes Security features 1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button. To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled. ■...

  • Page 849: Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

    Service Mode > Overview > Language switch Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Language switch Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1>...

  • Page 850: Back-Up Of Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode Back-up of service mode In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written in the service label. When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default.

  • Page 851: Copier

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SDL-STCH Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. DISPLAY Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) ■...
  • Page 852 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LANG-FR Display of French language file version LANG-FI Display of Finnish language file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file.
  • Page 853 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-10 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LANG-SV Display of Swedish language file version OCR-CN Display of Chinese OCR: simplified Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file. Lv.1 Details To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified).
  • Page 854 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-11 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION TTS-FR Dspl of French voice dictionary version TIMESTMP Display of timestamp version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French voice dictionary. Lv.1 Details To display the version of “Time Stamp”...
  • Page 855 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-12 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MEDIA-FR Dspl of French media information version MEDIA-HU Dspl of Hungarian media information ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of French media information. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian media information.
  • Page 856 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-13 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MEDIA-TW Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad SYSTEM Dspl Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional). Lv.1 Details To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file.
  • Page 857 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-14 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION UI-RES Display of UI resource file version COPY-IT Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version Lv.1 Details To display the UIRES version. Lv.1 Details To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UIRES consists of the resource file which is necessary to display the...
  • Page 858 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-15 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-DA Dspl of COPY appli Danish file version COPY-PL Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version Lv.2 Details To display the Danish language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA (JAVA UI).
  • Page 859 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-16 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-CR Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version SEND-FR Dspl of SEND appli French file version Lv.2 Details To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA (JAVA UI).
  • Page 860 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-17 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-CS Dspl of SEND appli Czech file version SEND-NO Dspl of SEND appli Norwegian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application UI).
  • Page 861 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-18 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-BU Dspl of SEND appli Bulgarian file ver SEND-VN Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver Lv.2 Details To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 862 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-19 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-KO Dspl of usful feat intro Korean file ver INTRO-NL Dspl of useful feat intro Dutch file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful Useful Features application.
  • Page 863 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-20 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-ID Dspl of useful feat intro Indon file ver INTRO-TH Dspl useful feat intro Thai file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Useful Features application.
  • Page 864 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-21 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-TW Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver:trad CSTMN-HU Dspl of custom menu Hungarian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu menu application.
  • Page 865 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-22 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-SV Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version CSTMN-CA Dspl of custom menu Catalan file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu application.
  • Page 866 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-23 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-ZH Dspl Accessibility Chinese file ver:smpl ACSBT-FI Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility Accessibility application.
  • Page 867 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-24 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-SL Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver ACSBT-TK Dspl of accessibility Turkish file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility application.
  • Page 868 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-25 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ERS-ZH Display of ERS Chinese file ver:smpl ERS-HU Display of ERS Hungarian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application.
  • Page 869 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-26 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ERS-ID Display of ERS Indonesian file ver ERS-VN Display of ERS Vietnamese file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS application.
  • Page 870 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-27 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION NLS-EL Display of UAC Greek file version NLS-SV Display of UAC Swedish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for UAC application.
  • Page 871 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-28 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LS-SRL Dspl of serial No. of Laser Scanner Unit LANG-VN Display of Vietnamese language file ver Lv.2 Details To display the serial number of Laser Scanner Unit. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
  • Page 872 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-29 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-KO Display of BOX appli Korean file version BOX-NL Display of BOX appli Dutch file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 873 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-30 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-ID Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver BOX-TH Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA application (JAVA UI).

  • Page 874: User

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-31 ■ USER ■ ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > USER COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS SPDTYPE Dspl of Ctrollr Board engine speed type FEEDER Display of DADF connection state Lv.1 Details To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of DADF.
  • Page 875 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-32 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS DATA-CON Dspl of NE Controller connection state NETWARE Install state dspl of NetWare firmware Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of NE Controller. Lv.1 Details To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware.

  • Page 876: Analog

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG 8-33 ■ ANALOG COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS IA-RAM Dspl of MNCON PCB 1 DDR2-SDRAM capacity COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG Lv.1 Details To display the memory (DDR2-SDRAM) capacity of the Main TEMP Display of inside temperature Controller PCB 1.
  • Page 877 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS 8-34 ■ CST-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG PDK-TEMP Dspl of POD Deck compartment temp COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS Lv.1 Details To display the compartment temperature of POD Deck Lite. WIDTH-C3 Display of Cassette 3 paper size It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different Lv.2 Details...

  • Page 878: Hv-Sts

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS 8-35 ■ HV-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS TR-LV-T Dspl ppr lead edge trns bias output tmg COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS Lv.1 Details To display the transfer bias output timing in the paper leading edge PRIMARY Display of primary charging current position.

  • Page 879: Ccd

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-36 ■ CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN-OR Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): frt COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD Lv.2 Details To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit TARGET-B Shading target value (B) on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
  • Page 880 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-37 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD LAMP-CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): frt GAIN-BW1 Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): frt Lv.2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit Lv.2 Details To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of (paper front) in color scanning mode.
  • Page 881 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-38 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN2BW3 Img Sensor gain level adj VL3(B&W): Back GAIN2-ER Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):bck Lv.2 Details To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Lv.2 Details To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit Scanner Unit (paper back).

  • Page 882: Dpot

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 8-39 ■ DPOT COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT VLT-H1 Bright area target potential VL: heavy 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT Lv.1 Details To display the bright area target potential VL with heavy paper 1. DPOT-K Display of Bk Drum surface potential Use case...

  • Page 883: Sensor

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC 8-40 ■ SENSOR ■ MISC COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC DOC-SZ Dspl size detect by Original Size Sensr LPOWER Display of laser light intensity Lv.2 Details To display the original size detected by Original Size Sensor. Lv.2 Details To display the laser power setting value during image formation in real time.

  • Page 884: Envrnt

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE 8-41 ■ ENVRNT ■ 2D-SHADE COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE Environment Indication 2D-STS Display of 2D shading ON/OFF The readings of the environment sensor and the fixing thermistor (main) are indicated as a Lv.1 Details To display ON/OFF of 2D shading.

  • Page 885: I/O (I/O Display Mode)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-42 I/O (I/O display mode) Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P003 15 Primary Charging Shutter Sensor PS94 1: HP front Address bit Name Symbol Remarks 14 Not used 13 For R&D use P001 15 Not used 12 For R&D use...
  • Page 886 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-43 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P004 15 Not used P005 15 Roller Bias OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON 14 Not used 14 Pre-transfer Charging PCB Remote PCB26 0: ON 13 Not used 13 Develop High Voltage PCB Remote PCB12...
  • Page 887 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-44 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P006 15 For R&D use P007 15 Shift Tray Rear Tray Full Sensor / PS104 0: Full Shift Tray Front Tray Full Sensor (rear) / 14 Not used PS105...
  • Page 888 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-45 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P008 15 Fixing Power Supply Detection 1: iRA6075 Series P009 15 5V sensor ON Signal (Fixing 1: ON Assembly) 14 Not used 14 Not used 13 Not used 13 Not used...
  • Page 889 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-46 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P011 15 Developing Motor Error 1: Stop P012 15 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan Error FM17 1: Stop 14 Drum Motor Error 1: Stop 14 Laser Scanner Cooling Fan Error FM16...
  • Page 890 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-47 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P014 15 Not used P015 15 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1/2 PS19 1: Paper presence 14 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air FM32/ 1: Full Speed 14 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid...
  • Page 891 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-48 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P016 15 Cassette3 Lifter Motor Error 1: Error P017 15 Not used 14 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 PS70 Detect paper level by combination 14 Not used of the Paper Level Sensor 1/2...
  • Page 892 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-49 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P019 15 Not used P020 15 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS49 Detect paper level by combination of the Paper Level Sensor 1/2 14 Not used 0: OFF 13 Vertical Path Sensor 4...
  • Page 893 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-50 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P021 15 Not used P023 15 For R&D use 14 Not used 14 For R&D use 13 Not used 13 For R&D use 12 Not used 12 For R&D use 11 Feed Driver Cooling Fan Half Speed FM40...
  • Page 894 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) 8-51 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P025 15 Not used P027 15 Transfer High Voltage PCB PCB13 0: Connect Connection 14 Not used 14 Not used 13 Not used 13 Transfer High Voltage PCB 24V PCB13...

  • Page 895: Host Machine_Main Controller (Dc-Con>P001 To P005))

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005)) 8-52 ■ Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005)) Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P029 15 Transfer High Voltage Positive Bias PCB13 0: ON Address Name Symbol Remarks...

  • Page 896: Reader (R-Con>P001 To P005)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005) 8-53 ■ Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005) Address Name Symbol Remarks P004 B_DDI_SPI1 Fix to 1 Address Name Symbol Remarks B_DDI_SCTS 0: Transmission is available P001 Scanner Unit HP Sensor 1: HP B_DDI_SPRDY 0: Engine ready...

  • Page 897: Adf (Feeder>P001 To P007)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007) 8-54 ■ ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007) Address Name Symbol Remarks P005 Pickup Motor Direction 1: Rotation direction, 0: (Not used) Address Name Symbol Remarks DA Enable 1: Enable, 0: Reset P001 24V Power Supply Monitor...

  • Page 898: Paper Deck Uint - A1 (Dc-Con>P048 To P050)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - A1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050) 8-55 ■ Paper Deck Uint - A1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050) Addres Description Symbol Remarks P050 15 for R&D Addres Description Symbol Remarks 14 not used P048 13 for R&D...

  • Page 899: Paper Deck Uint - D1 (Dc-Con>P048 To P050)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - D1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050) 8-56 ■ Paper Deck Uint - D1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050) Addres Description Symbol Remarks P050 15 for R&D Addres Description Symbol Remarks 14 not used P048 13 for R&D...

  • Page 900: Inserter - L1 (Sorter>P047 To P061)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) 8-57 ■ Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) Address Name Symbol Remarks P052 Folding unit sensor H:No unit Address Name Symbol Remarks By Borah motor driver_standby signal - H:Movement is possible L:stop P047 Reserve unit motor*B...

  • Page 901: Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (Sorter>P047 To P061)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) 8-58 ■ Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) Address Name Symbol Remarks P057 Address Name Symbol Remarks P047 Reserve unit motor*B H:active EEPROM/DA converter CLK signal...
  • Page 902 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061) 8-59 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P052 Folding unit sensor H:No unit P057 C fold stopper solenoid H:Absorption By Borah motor driver_standby signal H:Movement is possible C fold guide solenoid...

  • Page 903: External Punch - A1 (Sorter>Sorter>P041 To P046)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046) 8-60 ■ External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046) Addres Description Symbol Remarks P045 SW602 on the punch controller PCB 0:ON/1:OFF Addres Description Symbol Remarks SW603 on the punch controller PCB...

  • Page 904: Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (Sorter>P001 To P040)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-61 ■ Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 Addres Description Symbol Remarks P005 not used to P040) not used tray motor clock signal Addres...
  • Page 905 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-62 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P009 tray 1 paper sensor PI111 0:paper present/1:paper P012 swing height sensor PI123 0:close/1:open absent...
  • Page 906 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-63 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P016 not used P020 not used rear aligning plate motor direction M104 0:CW/1:CCW not used...
  • Page 907 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-64 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P024 not used P029 alignment plate HP sensor 0:besides HP/1:HP not used not used not used...
  • Page 908 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040) 8-65 Addres Description Symbol Remarks Addres Description Symbol Remarks P033 not used P037 paper pushing plate motor EN signal 0:ON/1:OFF not used paper pushing plate motor FWD...

  • Page 909: Adjust

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY 8-66 ADJUST ■ ADJ-XY COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ■ AE ADJ-X Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge COPIER >...

  • Page 910: Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY 8-67 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt] ADJY-DF2 Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[bck] Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the image position of back side in horizontal scanning direction at DADF reading.

  • Page 911: Ccd

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-68 ■ CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD SH-TRGT Shading target value (B&W) [Copyboard] COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Lv.1 Details To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode. W-PLT-X White level data(X) entry of white plate Use case...
  • Page 912 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-69 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFTAR-R Shading target value (R) [Front side] MTF2-M1 MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 913 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-70 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M6 MTF value 6 setting: horz scan [Front] MTF2-S2 MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Front] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 914 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-71 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-S7 MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Front] 100DF2RG Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:bck Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 915 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-72 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH2B10 Complex chart No.10 data(B) [Front side] MTF-M1 MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Back] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 916 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-73 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-M6 MTF value 6 setting: horz scan [Back] MTF-S2 MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Back] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 917 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-74 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-S7 MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Back] DFCH-R10 Complex chart No.10 data (R) [Back side] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 918 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-75 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH-G2 Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Back side] MTF2-M12 MTF value 12 setting: horz scan [Front] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 919 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-76 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-M11 MTF value 11 setting: horz scan [Back] DFCH2K2 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Front] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 920 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-77 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFTAR-BW Shading target value (B&W) [Front side] DFTBK-R Shading target value (R) [Back side] Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.

  • Page 921: Laser

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-78 ■ LASER ■ IMG-REG COPIER > ADJUST > LASER COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG PVE-OFST Adj of write start position of laser MAG-H-K Fine adj of magnification: horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position.

  • Page 922: Develop

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-79 ■ DEVELOP ■ DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP COPIER > ADJUST > DENS BIAS Adjustment of developing bias DENS-ADJ Density correction of copy image Lv.1 Details To adjust the developing bias when the potential control is not Lv.1 Details To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table.

  • Page 923: Blank

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-80 ■ BLANK ■ V-CONT COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin EPOTOFST Manual entry of Potential Sensor offset Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. Lv.1 Details To set the offset auto adjustment value of Potential Sensor manually.
  • Page 924 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-81 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VD-OFST Dark area tgt potential ofst VL entry VL-OF-H2 Fine adj bright area target potntl:hvy 2 Lv.1 Details To set the offset auto adjustment value of dark area target potential Lv.2 Details To make a fine adjustment of bright area target potential VL with VL manually.

  • Page 925: Pascal

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI 8-82 ■ PASCAL ■ HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI OFST-P-K Bk density adj at test print reading PRIMARY Adjustment of primary charging current Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Lv.1 Details To adjust the primary charging current flows to the Primary Charging Gradation (Full Adjust).
  • Page 926 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-83 ■ HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-OFS2 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Heavy 1 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller TR-OFS1 Adj transfer target current offset:Plain for heavy paper 1.
  • Page 927 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-84 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-OFS3 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Heavy 2 TR-OFS4 Adj transfer tgt current offset: Thin Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for heavy paper 2.
  • Page 928 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-85 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-OFS5 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Special1 TR-OFS6 Adj transfer tgt current offset:Special2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for special paper 1.
  • Page 929 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-86 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR TR-L-OF3 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Heavy2 TR-L-OF6 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Spcl 2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value Lv.2 Details To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing for heavy paper 2.
  • Page 930 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-87 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-OF2 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst:Heavy1 P-TR-OF3 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst:Heavy2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for heavy paper 1.
  • Page 931 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-88 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-OF4 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Thin P-TR-OF5 Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Special 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for thin Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for paper.
  • Page 932 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-89 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-OF6 Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Special 2 TR-SP2 Set trns tgt crrnt adj: special paper 2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for Lv.2 Details To set the paper type of special paper 2 which the offset value of the special paper 2.

  • Page 933: Feed-Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-90 ■ FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR P-TR-SP1 Set pre-trns charging crrnt adj: Spcl 1 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ Lv.2 Details To set the paper type of special paper 1 which the offset value of the REGIST Adj of registration start timing: Plain pre-transfer charging current is adjusted.
  • Page 934 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-91 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2 Left Deck write start pstn in horz scan ADJ-C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Left Deck.
  • Page 935 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-92 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-DK Write start pstn in horz scan:Deck/POD D REG-THCK Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 1/2 speed Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck/ POD Deck Lite.
  • Page 936 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-93 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REG-DUP2 Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 2nd side LP-MULT1 MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper.

  • Page 937: Cst-Adj

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ 8-94 ■ CST-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ LP-DUP2 Duplex pre-rgst arch amount:Hvy/Transp COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy MF-A4R Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width paper/transparency in duplex mode.

  • Page 938: Misc

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-95 ■ MISC COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ MF-A4 Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width COPIER > ADJUST > MISC Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. SEG-ADJ Set criteria for text/photo: front side When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the...
  • Page 939 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-96 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC COPIER > ADJUST > MISC ACS-CNT Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front WT-FL-LM Set of waste toner full dspl timing Lv.2 Details To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in Lv.1 Details If the user sets the darker/lighter copy density than the normal ACS mode.
  • Page 940 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-97 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC COPIER > ADJUST > MISC ACS-ADJ3 Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side TBSIS-WB Setting of blank band ejection time Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back Lv.2 Details To set the blank band ejection time.

  • Page 941: Exp-Led

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED 8-98 ■ EXP-LED COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED PR-EXP Setting of Pre-exposure LED current Lv.2 Details To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED. Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well.

  • Page 942: Function

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-99 FUNCTION COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL CARD Card number setting ■ INSTALL Lv.1 Details To set the card number to be used for Card Reader. A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards COPIER >...
  • Page 943 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-100 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COM-TEST Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co’s server CNT-DATE Set counter send start date to SC server Lv.1 Details To display the result of the connection test with the sales company’s Lv.1 Details To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter server.
  • Page 944 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-101 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL BRWS-ACT ON/OFF of service browser BIT-SVC OFF/ON of Web service of E-RDS Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of service browser. Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of Web service function of E-RDS.

  • Page 945: Ccd

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD 8-102 ■ CCD COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD MTF-CLC Deriving of MTF filter coefficient COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Lv.1 Details To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color MTF value of the DADF complex chart.

  • Page 946: Dpc

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST 8-103 ■ DPC ■ CST COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC COPIER > FUNCTION > CST Execution of potential control C3-STMTR Reg Cassette 3 STMTR stdrd width Lv.1 Details To execute potential control for the Photosensitive Drum manually. (It Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of STMTR paper width (139.5mm) on is usually executed automatically.)

  • Page 947: Cleaning

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING 8-104 ■ CLEANING COPIER > FUNCTION > CST C4-A4R Reg Cassette 4 A4R stdrd width COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the TBLT-CLN ETB cleaning Cassette 4.

  • Page 948: Fixing

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL 8-105 ■ FIXING ■ PANEL COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL NIP-CHK Check of fixing nip width LCD-CHK Check of LCD Panel dot missing Lv.1 Details To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing. Lv.1 Details To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur.

  • Page 949: Part-Chk

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK 8-106 ■ PART-CHK COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK MTR-ON Operation check of Motor COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR. Specification of operation Clutch The operation automatically stops after operation of 20 seconds.

  • Page 950: Clear

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-107 ■ CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR ADRS-BK Clear of address book COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Lv.1 Details To clear the address book data. Clear of error code Use case When clearing the address book data Lv.1 Details To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719).
  • Page 951 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-108 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR MN-CON RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board CA-KEY Deletion of CA certificate and key pair Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board. Lv.2 Details To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are All data on the SRAM Board is initialized.
  • Page 952 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-109 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR KEY-CLR Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board LANG-CLR Uninstallation of language files Lv.2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security Lv.2 Details To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files.

  • Page 953: Misc-R

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-110 ■ MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-DF1 Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R Lv.1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the SCANLAMP Light-up check of LED factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/...
  • Page 954 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-111 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-DF2 Sampling color back stream read MTF VL CLPLT-EN Color copyboard read MTF VL initial set Lv.1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/...
  • Page 955 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-112 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLDF1-EN Clr front stream read MTF VL initial set CLDF2-EN Clr back stream read MTF VL initial set Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color front side stream reading to the Lv.1 Details To return the MTF value for color back side stream reading to the factory setting value.
  • Page 956 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-113 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R CLM-TGT Fine adjustment of color MTF value RD-SHPOS Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn Lv.1 Details To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so Lv.2 Details To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed that the MTF value measured by CLM-PLTN/CLM-DF1/CLM-DF2...

  • Page 957: Misc-P

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P 8-114 ■ MISC-P COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P PJH-P-1 Detail info of print job history:100 job COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Lv.1 Details To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed P-PRINT Output of service mode setting value information.
  • Page 958 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ 8-115 ■ SENS-ADJ COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P DV-RT Idle rotation of Developing Assembly COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ Lv.1 Details To execute idle rotation of the Developing Assembly. STCK-LMT Adj of Shift Tray Full Sensor position Duration can be set by COPIER>...

  • Page 959: System

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM 8-116 ■ SYSTEM COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM HD-CLEAR Initialization of specified partition COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM Lv.1 Details To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE. DOWNLOAD Shift to download mode Use case When initializing the HDD partition Lv.1 Details...

  • Page 960: Shade

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE 8-117 ■ 2D-SHADE COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE Lv.2 Details To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB. M-LINE1 2D shading horizontal scan 1 correction Use case...
  • Page 961 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE 8-118 COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE SHD-P1 2D shading pattern 1 output Lv.1 Details To output pattern 1 for 2D shading. Use case When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.

  • Page 962: Cleaning

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING 8-119 OPTION COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING CLN-ADJ Set black band length for cleaning ■ CLEANING Lv.1 Details To set black band length for cleaning. When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to 0, the setting COPIER >...

  • Page 963: Custom

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-120 ■ CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM MAILYEAR Set auto add to e-mail Subject/File name COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM Lv.2 Details To set whether to add date, time and split number automatically to TEMP-TBL Set fixing control temp table: Plain the end of a character string of e-mail Subject/File name.
  • Page 964 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-121 COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM ABK-TOOL Allow access from address book mntc tool DEV-SP5 Device special settings 5 Lv.1 Details To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance Lv.2 Details To execute the device special settings 5.
  • Page 965 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-122 COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM AC-FREQ Setting of frequency of AC power RDEV-SP1 RCON device special settings 1 Lv.2 Details Although power frequency is judged for power control with the Lv.2 Details To execute the device special setting.

  • Page 966: Dsply-Sw

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-123 ■ DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM RDEV-SP7 RCON device special settings 7 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW Lv.2 Details To execute the device special setting. UI-COPY Display/hide of copy screen Use case For customization, etc.
  • Page 967 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-124 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW NWERR-SW OFF/ON of network-related error display IMGC-ADJ Dspl/hide of img adj item in user mode Lv.2 Details To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display. Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide the item relating to image When setting “0: OFF”...
  • Page 968 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-125 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW UI-HOLD Display/hide of hold job screen RMT-CNSL ON/OFF of MEAP console screen Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel. Lv.1 Details Selecting “1: ON”...
  • Page 969 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-126 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW UI-CUSTM ON/OFF of custom menu screen display SDTM-DSP Display/hide of auto shutdown time Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Auto Shutdown Time”...

  • Page 970: Env-Set

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-127 ■ ENV-SET ■ FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW ENVP-INT Temp, humid/Fix Roll temp log get cycle TRY-CHG Set of Delivery Tray switch at tray full Lv.1 Details To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 971 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-128 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK2-TURN ON/OFF of L-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn DK3-TURN ON/OFF of Casstt3 Pckup Rol little rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Left Deck Pickup Roller a little after Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.
  • Page 972 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-129 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK4-TURN ON/OFF of Casstt4 Pckup Rol little rotn DK1-TURN ON/OFF of R-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller a little after Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Right Deck Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.

  • Page 973: Fnc-Sw

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-130 ■ FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW DK5-TURN ON/OFF of OP-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW Lv.1 Details To set whether to rotate the Option Deck Pickup Roller a little after PO-CNT ON/OFF of potential control function completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.
  • Page 974 YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) 0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size) AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch 1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
  • Page 975 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-132 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW ORG-LGL Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL MODELSZ2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode Lv.2 Details To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
  • Page 976 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-133 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW KSIZE-SW Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support SJB-UNW Reserve upper limit of secured print job Lv.2 Details To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K). Lv.2 Details To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print job.
  • Page 977 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-134 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW UNLMTBND Over 400 binders print job support set ILSZ-JAM ON/OFF of size difference jam detection Lv.1 Details To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders. Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of size difference jam detection.
  • Page 978 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-135 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW CE/SCNR Dspl/set scan connector disconnect times INVALPDL Disable of PDL license Lv.1 Details To display/change the number of Scanner connector disconnection Lv.1 Details To disable the registered PDL license.
  • Page 979 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-136 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW LOCLFIRM Set to allow firmware update by file FAX-INT Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the Lv.2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
  • Page 980 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-137 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW UA-OFFSW ON/OFF of unified auth function SVC-RUI Enabling of RUI function for servicing Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function. Lv.1 Details To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function...
  • Page 981 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-138 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW BXSHIFT Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin T-DLV-BK Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm Lv.1 Details To set whether to judge the job as a job “without binding” when Lv.1 Details To set the Bk-toner level to display “absence of toner”...

  • Page 982: Img-Dev

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-139 ■ IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV Set of highland ev voltg reduction mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV Lv.2 Details To set the highland environment voltage reduction mode in the case TSPLY-SW [Not used] that leak occurs at a high latitude.
  • Page 983 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-140 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV BB-CNT Set Bk band output intvl: Cleaning Blade TBLTCLSW Setting of ETB cleaning timing Lv.1 Details To set the paper interval to output black band for preventing flip of Lv.1 Details To set the timing to execute ETB cleaning control.

  • Page 984: Img-Fix

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-141 ■ IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV DRM-IDL3 Set first idle rotn time in HH Ev COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX Lv.1 Details To set the idle rotation time to be performed first time for the day in FIX-CLN Set fixing cleaning execution interval an HH (high temperature and high humidity) environment.
  • Page 985 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-142 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX CBLTINVL Setting of Fixing Web Solenoid ON times RAG-CONT Set fix smeared image ctrl mode level Lv.1 Details To set frequency to turn ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid. Lv.1 Details To set level of the mode (skipping) to control smeared image caused If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Pressure Roller, set 1.
  • Page 986 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-143 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX P-BETWN Setting of paper interval: 2-sided mode FX-WNKL Setting of paper wrinkle prevention mode Lv.1 Details To set the paper interval at 2-sided mode. Lv.2 Details To set paper wrinkle prevention mode.

  • Page 987: Img-Lsr

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR 8-144 ■ IMG-LSR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX WEB-LIFE Set Fixing Web level alarm notice timing COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR Lv.1 Details To set the timing to notify the Web absence alarm according to the LAPC-SW ON/OFF of ini rotn/last rotn APC crrct time required for replacement of the Fixing Cleaning Web.

  • Page 988: Img-Mcon

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-145 ■ IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON SCR-SLCT Halftone process in Photo Printout mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON Lv.2 Details To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo PASCAL Use/no use of auto gradation adj data Printout mode when making a copy.
  • Page 989 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-146 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON VP-ART Setting of line art processing C-S-P-D High dens end edge crrct: PDL dens prrty Lv.2 Details To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF. Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the...

  • Page 990: Img-Rdr

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR 8-147 ■ IMG-RDR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON VDADDCNT Horz added dot amnt at white dots reduct COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR Lv.1 Details To adjust the amount of dots added to side at white dots reduction DF-BLINE ON/OFF of dust dtct in DADF stream read mode.
  • Page 991 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR 8-148 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR DFDST-L2 DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job ABC-MD2 Adj back digital ABC bckgd dens reduct Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control Lv.1 Details To adjust the background density reduction setting level of back side that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode.

  • Page 992: Network

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-149 ■ NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR DF2DSTL2 Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end:bck COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control RAW-DATA Setting of received data print mode that is executed by the Scanner Unit (paper back) after the job is...
  • Page 993 T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal Default value application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canon’s own protocol). FTPTXPN Specification of SEND port (FTP) number CMD-PORT ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 994 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-151 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK NS-GSAPI Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth NS-PLN Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry Lv.2 Details To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at authentication.
  • Page 995 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-152 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK RMT-LGIN Set to allow remote login to SSH server WUEV-SW Setting of sleep notification execution Lv.2 Details To set whether to allow remote login from the remote host (SSH Lv.2 Details To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application client: DA) to debug console of the SSH server.
  • Page 996 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-153 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK WUEN-LIV Recovery time setting after sleep notice PROXYRES Setting of proxy response to Windows Lv.2 Details To set the time from the sleep start from network without job Lv.2 Details To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode.
  • Page 997 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-154 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK SPDALDEL Initialization of SPD value SP-LINK Mode setting at 1W sleep Lv.2 Details To initialize all the SPD values that are under management. Lv.1 Details Switch to execute 10base-T standby as default to realize the standby SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
  • Page 998 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-155 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK ILOGMODE Setting of IP address block mode PFWFTPRT Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND Lv.1 Details To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of IP Lv.1 Details When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets block.

  • Page 999: User

    Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-156 ■ USER COPIER > OPTION > USER COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3 COPIER > OPTION > USER Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check COPY-LIM Setting of upper limit for copy screen.
  • Page 1000 Lv.1 Details To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting Related UI menu Copy > Options charging management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control card). Supplement/memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used.

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagerunner advance 6265 seriesImagerunner advance 6255 series

Table of Contents